DRAFT Project Manual For Asbestos Hazard Response Action at Rosenwald School At Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 In New Orleans, Louisiana Orleans Parish School Board Prepared by: Materials Management Group, Inc. 3520 General DeGaulle Dr., Suite 3010, New Orleans, LA 70114 Dr. Richard Lo, CIH July 20, 2018 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Project information. Work covered by Contract Documents. Work under separate contracts. Owner-furnished products. Access to site. Coordination with occupants. Work restrictions. Specification and drawing conventions. Miscellaneous provisions. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Asbestos Hazard Response Action at Rosenwald School 1. Project Location: Julius Rosenwald Elementary School, 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 B. Owner: Orleans Parish School Board. C. Environmental Consultant: Materials Management Group, Inc. 3520 General DeGaulle Dr., Suite 3010, New Orleans, LA 70114 504-368-0568 1. Environmental Consultant's Representatives: a. Dr. Richard Lo 3520 General DeGaulle Dr., Suite 3010, New Orleans, LA 70114 richardl@mmgnola.com b. Ms. Braelin Carter 3520 General DeGaulle Dr., Suite 3010, New Orleans, LA 70114 braelinc@mmgnola.com 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. The Scope of Work (SOW) consists of that stated in Section 01 10 30 Summary of Work, Asbestos Hazard Response, Section 01 10 40 Special Project Procedures, Asbestos Hazard Response, and all supporting Sections in the Project Manual. B. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.5 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. A. General: Cooperate fully with separate OWNER, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, and contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. B. Other Work: N/A 1.6 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS AND SERVICES A. OWNER will not furnish products for the WORK indicated. B. OWNER through the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will secure the construction permit from the City of New Orleans. 1.7 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for asbestos hazard response operations as indicated on Drawings, by the Contract limits, and as indicated by requirements of this Section. B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the WORK is indicated. 1. Driveways, Walkways, and Entrances: Keep primary driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to OWNER, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, Owner's employees, Charter Operator, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of primary driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. 1.8 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will not occupy the site during the WORK period. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from OWNER and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to OWNER of activities that will affect OWNER's operations. 1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work on site to normal business working hours of 8:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3. Weekend Hours: Allowed unless otherwise directed from OWNER. Early Morning Hours: Follow restrictions as applicable in the City Of New Orleans Zoning Ordinance or as directed by OWNER. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Verify and obtain approval from OWNER (2) days prior to shutdown C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by OWNER or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 1. Notify OWNER not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain OWNER's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted. Smoking or vaping on the Project site is not permitted. E. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times. Identification tags should include at a minimum employee’s photograph, the person’s name, employer, and that employer’s role on the Project. F. Employee Screening: Comply with OWNER's requirements for drug and background screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site. 1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with OWNER. 1.10 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the WORK of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in Specifications. One or more of following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual 1.11 ADDITIONAL COST ESTIMATING SERVICES A. Provides additional cost estimating services and detail schedule of values as follows: 1. Provide cost breakdown of Contract Sum in format specified in Section 01 29 00 Payment Procedures and as additionally required by OWNER to meet project funding requirements of Federal, State, and Local Agencies. 2. Services may include, but is not limited to: a. Detailed breakdown of construction costs separating similar scope items into multiple line items, including breakdowns of subcontracted items; b. Identifying alternative scenarios in order to document relative costs of demolition and replacement relative to repairs of similar items; and c. Estimating costs of alternative construction. d. Meeting with OWNER, Design Team, and Federal, State, and Local Agencies as required reconciling estimates of costs and assisting in alignment of abatement, demolition, and construction costs with requirements to funding sources. SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 1.12 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. The CONTRACTOR will coordinate with the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT for the following: 1. Parking in the school parking lot(s) of staff/faculty parking areas. 2. Laydown areas, job trailers, portable toilet facilities, dumpster placement, etc. 3. Weekly progress meeting will be held each week at the same time and on the same day of the week. CONTRACTOR will provide a covered, dry area with seating and a table to conduct a weekly progress meeting between the CONTRACTOR and the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 4. CONTRACTOR is responsible for photographing prior to construction, during construction, and after construction. No Students or School Staff will be photographed for any reason. 5. CONTRACTOR will send the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT a copy of the recorded contract and the receipt that contains the instrument number. 6. CONTRACTOR will provide a 3-week “look ahead” on the documents provided by the OWNER. 7. Employee badges are required on the job site. The employee’s picture, employee’s name, and company name will be on the front of the badge and will be visible on the employee at all times while on the job site. 8. Daily sign-in rosters for all employees on site will be turned in at each weekly progress meeting. 9. CONTRACTOR will keep a daily construction log. Copies of the logs will be turned in at each weekly progress meeting. 10. Alcohol, tobacco products, weapons/firearms or drugs are not allowed on the job site/campus. 11. CONTRACTOR may NOT use school toilet facilities. CONTRACTORs shall prove temporary facilities for their workers. 12. CONTRACTOR will be responsible for restoring any existing conditions that the Project affected. 13. CONTRACTOR will provide supports to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT in order to secure the Construction Permit from the City of New Orleans. 14. CONTRACTOR is responsible for securing and paying for all permits associated with this Project, except the Construction Permit from the City of New Orleans. 15. OWNER will provide all utilities needed to complete this Project. See also Section 01 50 00 1.3 for CONTRACTOR’s financial responsibilities regarding utilities usage during this Project. 16. CONTRACTOR will submit a site safety plan specific to the location. 17. CONTRACTOR will submit a hurricane preparedness plan specific to the location. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 10 30 – SUMMARY OF WORK, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Division 01 (General Requirements) Technical Specification Sections C. Division 02 (Site Work) Specifications Sections D. Division 09 (Finishes) Specification Sections E. Attachment A Figures 1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Orleans Parish School Board (OWNER) through Materials Management Group, Inc (ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT) has prepared this specification for conducting an asbestos hazard response action (WORK) inside Julius Rosenwald Elementary School located at 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 (SCHOOL). The WORK consists of an asbestos hazard response action conducted in four phases throughout the main SCHOOL building. B. For the purposes of completing the WORK as required by LAC 33:III Chapter 27 and the Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality (LDEQ), response action areas will be divided into contiguous units (CUs) as determined by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. For the purposes of this specification, CU’s shall be defined as a combination of interior structural units which may include, but may not be limited to, classrooms, hallways, offices, and/or multi-purpose spaces which may be effectively isolated using critical barriers and other appropriate containment structures for the purposes of conducting the WORK. C. The four asbestos hazard response phases consist of: 1. INITIAL ACTIVITIES: site preparation, CU isolation, and asbestos-containing waste material (ACWM) removal activities; 2. HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES: ceiling tile removal, vinyl composition floor tile (VCT) removal, carpet removal, specialized cleaning, and moveable item decontamination activities, as applicable; 3. CLEARANCE ACTIVITIES: aggressive air sampling for asbestos fibers as described in the mandatory section of 40 CFR 763 Subpart E, Appendix A; and 4. POST HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES: ceiling tile replacement and VCT floor tile replacement. D. For the purpose of conducting CLEARANCE ACTIVITIES, CUs will be considered functional spaces (FS) only after all INITIAL ACTIVITIES and HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES are complete. INITIAL ACTIVIES, HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES, AND POST-HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES will be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR; CLEARANCE ACTIVITIES will be conducted by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. For additional information, see also Figure 1: Proposed Contiguous Unit Map. 1. INITIAL ACTIVITIES a. Site Preparation Activities: 1) Prepare all WORK AREAs in accordance with Section 01 52 60 Temporary Enclosures. A WORK AREA is defined as a “location where asbestos hazard response actions occur.” b. ACWM Removal Activities: 1) For the purposes of this project, ACWM is defined as materials with a flexible, porous surface which are potentially contaminated with asbestos fibers, which cannot be effectively cleaned using the methods described in this Specification and must therefore be considered “asbestos-contaminated waste material.” SUMMARY OF WORK, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE 01 10 30 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. This may include but may not be limited to ceiling tiles, carpets, textbooks, paper products including decorations, posters, and teaching materials, and upholstered furniture including plush couches and chairs. 2) Materials fitting this description shall be removed and disposed of as ACWM by the CONTRACTOR under the direction of the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 2. HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES a. Drop Ceiling Tile Removal Activities 1) All drop ceiling tiles (CTs) throughout the SCHOOL will be removed and disposed of as ACWM according to the relevant regulations contained in LAC 33:III Chapters 27 and 51. After a given CU has been isolated using standard containment procedures and critical barriers, it will be the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to remove all CTs substantially intact and dispose of them appropriately before continuing on with all HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES. It is also the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to remove the drop ceiling grid and dispose of it properly as ACWM. b. Asbestos-Containing Thermal Systems Insulation (TSI) Repair 1) After the removal of all CTs in a given CU, but before specialized asbestos hazard response cleaning procedures commence, it will be the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to repair any damaged, friable or non-friable, known or suspected ACM TSI located above the drop ceiling grid. c. Removal of Floor Coverings 1) After the removal of all CTs in a given CU, but before specialized asbestos hazard response cleaning procedures commence, it will be the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to remove all VCT tiles and ACM mastics located throughout a given CU. 2) All carpet throughout the School shall be removed and replaced with VCT tiles during the course of the WORK. d. Encapsulation of Surfaces 1) For those surfaces contained in a given CU which have a rigid, non-porous surface, or have a rigid, semipermeable, textured surface which CAN be effectively cleaned through the pre-approved combination of HEPA vacuuming, wet cleaning methods, and ambient air filtration, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all preparation and cleaning. The limited encapsulation of certain surfaces may be necessary to achieve final WORK AREA clearance, depending on site conditions and pending preapproval by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. Surfaces which have a rigid, non-porous surface, or have a rigid, textured, semi-permeable surface which CAN be effectively cleaned using the methods contained in this Specification may include, but may not be limited to, folding classroom partitions, blackboards, acoustical tile, and corkboards. e. Cleaning – Horizontal & Vertical Surfaces (Non-Electrical) 1) The CONTRACTOR will conduct the cleaning of each CU within a designated response action WORK AREA. Cleaning should include but is not necessarily limited to, HEPA vacuuming of all horizontal and vertical surfaces inside the CU, wet cleaning of all horizontal and vertical surfaces inside the CU, and/or agitation of all horizontal and vertical surfaces inside the CU using a 1 HP leaf blower followed by 24-48 of air scrubbing using negative air units equipped with HEPA filters. CU components to be cleaned according to these directions include, but are not necessarily limited to, walls, floors, roof decking, doors, SUMMARY OF WORK, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE 01 10 30 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. windows, acoustical tile which is in good condition and still firmly affixed to structural substrate, built-in bookshelves, cabinets, and countertops. f. Cleaning – Suspended Light Fixtures and Electrical Panels 1) The CONTRACTOR will conduct the cleaning of each suspended light fixture and electrical panel within a given CU. Cleaning should include HEPA vacuuming of all horizontal and vertical surfaces associated with the light fixture/electrical panel (2 passes) and/or agitation of all horizontal and vertical surfaces associated with the light fixture/electrical panel using a 1 HP leaf blower followed by 24-48 of air scrubbing using negative air units equipped with HEPA filters. g. Moveable Item (MI) Decontamination 1) MIs eligible for decontamination shall be defined as items which have a rigid, non-porous surface, or have a rigid, semi-permeable, textured surface which CAN be effectively vacuumed and/or wet-cleaned to mitigate potential asbestos fiber contamination. Such items may include, but may not be limited to metal, wood, or plastic chairs, tables, and desks, bookshelves, and file cabinets. 2) The ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will delineate an aggregation and decontamination (A/D) area for MIs within each CU. MIs will be moved to the A/D area and decontaminated using a two-stage decontamination process consisting of wet cleaning and HEPA vacuuming. 3. CLEARANCE ACTIVITIES a. Once all INITIAL ACTIVITIES and HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES are complete, the CU will be subject to visual inspection by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. Once the CU has passed visual inspection, the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will designate it a functional space (FS). b. FS will be subject to aggressive air sampling for asbestos fibers as described the mandatory section of 40 CFR 763 Subpart E, Appendix A (CLEARANCE ACTIVITIES). c. The ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will conduct all CLEARANCE ACTIVITIES. d. If a given FS fails to pass CLEARANCE ACTIVITIES, the CONTRACTOR will be responsible for conducting all additional HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES required before the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT conducts additional CLEARANCE ACTIVITIES. 4. POST HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES a. CONTRACTOR shall replace the ceiling tiles and drop ceiling grid in accordance with Section 09 51 13. b. CONTRACTOR shall replace all carpet and VCT tiles removed during Hazard Response Work with new VCT tiles in accordance with Section 09 65 19. c. CONTRACTOR shall perform all final site cleaning activities associated with the WORK. Additional cleaning activities may include, but may not be limited to, the removal of all remaining containment structures, projectassociated debris or waste that as not be designated asbestos-contaminated waste material, project equipment removal both inside the School and in exterior staging areas, and the removal of temporary structures associated with the WORK including tents, trailers, dumpsters, scaffolds etc. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING SUMMARY OF WORK, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE 01 10 30 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. A. A mandatory preconstruction meeting will be held at a time and place designated by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT for the purpose of identifying OWNER and CONTRACTOR responsibilities and explanation of administrative procedures. B. The CONTRACTOR shall also use this meeting for the following minimum addenda: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Construction schedule. Use of the areas of the Site. Delivery and storage. Safety. Security. Plan of Action to perform the WORK of the Project. Subcontractor procedures relating to: Submittals, Change Orders, and Applications for payment. C. The Construction schedule and Plan of Action constitute required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. All submitted documentation shall be reviewed for compliance by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. D. Attendees shall include: OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and its SUPERINTENDENT. 3.2 COORDINATION A. Inform each party, as designated by the OWNER, of procedures required for coordination, requirements for giving notice, reports, and meetings in accordance with Section 01 31 00. END OF SECTION 01 10 30 SUMMARY OF WORK, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE 01 10 30 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 10 40 – SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Definitions. Standards, Guidelines. Submittals and Notices. Security and Access Controls. Emergency Planning. Pre-Start Meeting. Support Activities and Personnel. Medical Monitoring. Specification and Drawing Conventions. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. Division 01 (General Requirements) Technical Specification Sections. 3. Division 02 (Site Work) Specification Sections. 4. Division 09 (Finishes) Specification Sections. 5. Figure 1: Proposed Contiguous Unit Map. 6. Figure 2: Proposed Lay-Down Yard & Staging Area Map. 1.2 DEFINITIONS Definitions contained in this Section are not necessarily complete, but are general to the extent that they are not defined more explicitly elsewhere in the Contract Documents. A. Accredited or Accreditation (when referring to a person or laboratory): A person or laboratory accredited in accordance with Section 206 of Title II of the Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA) and by the Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality (LDEQ) under the provisions of LAC 33:III.Chapter 27, Appendix A—Agent Accreditation Plan. B. Adequately Wet: sufficiently mix or penetrate with liquid to prevent the release of particulates. If visible emissions are observed coming from ACM, then that material has not been adequately wetted. However, the absence of visible emissions is not sufficient evidence of being adequately wet. Once contained, water droplets formed inside disposal containers will be sufficient evidence of being adequately wet. C. Air Cell: Insulation normally used on pipes and duct work that is comprised of corrugated cardboard which is frequently comprised of asbestos combined with cellulose or refractory binders. D. Air Monitoring: The process of measuring the fiber content of a specific volume of air. E. Air Monitoring Group: An entity providing professional services for obtaining and analyzing airborne fiber concentrations in the workplace. Representatives must have at least a valid Contractor/Supervisor Certification from the LDEQ and participate in NIOSH Proficiency Analytical Testing Program (PAT). F. Amended Water: Water to which a surfactant has been added to decrease the surface tension to 35 or less dynes. G. Aerosol: A system consisting of particles, solids, or liquids, suspended in air. H. Asbestos: The asbestiform varieties of serpentinite (chrysotile), riebeckite (crocidolite), cummingtonite-grunerite, anthophyllite, and actinolite-tremolite. For purposes of determining respiratory and worker protection both the asbestiform and non-asbestiform varieties of the above minerals and any of these materials that have been chemically treated and/or altered shall be considered as asbestos. SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE 01 10 40 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. I. Asbestos-Containing Material (ACM): Any material containing more than 1% by weight of asbestos of any type or mixture of types. J. Asbestos-Containing Building Material (ACBM): Surfacing ACM, thermal system insulation ACM, or miscellaneous ACM that is found in or on interior structural members or other parts of a building. K. Asbestos-Containing Waste Material (ACWM): Any material which is, or is suspected of being, or any material contaminated with an ACM which is to be removed from a WORK AREA for disposal. L. Asbestos Debris: Pieces of ACBM that can be identified by color, texture, or composition, as originating with ACBM. M. Authorized Visitor: The OWNER, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, testing lab personnel, emergency personnel, or a representative of any federal, state and local regulatory or other agency having authority over the PROJECT. N. Barrier: Any surface that seals off the WORK AREA to inhibit the movement of fibers. O. Breathing Zone: A hemisphere forward of the shoulders with a radius of approximately 6 to 9 inches. P. Category I Non-friable Asbestos-containing Materials: Asbestos-containing packings, gaskets, resilient floor covering and asphalt roofing products containing more than one percent asbestos as determined by using the method specified in Appendix A, Subpart F, 40 Code of Federal Regulations Part 763, Section 1, Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM). Q. Category II Non-friable Asbestos-containing Materials: Any material, excluding Category I Nonfriable ACM, containing more than one percent asbestos as determined by using the method specified (PLM); that, when dry, cannot be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure. R. Ceiling Concentration: The concentration of an airborne substance that shall not be exceeded. S. Certified Industrial Hygienist (C.I.H.): An individual certified in Comprehensive Practice by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene. T. Cutting: to penetrate with a sharp-edged instrument, including sawing, but not including shearing, slicing, or punching. U. Demolition: The wrecking or taking out of any building component, system, finish or assembly of a facility together with any related handling operations. V. Disposal Bag: A properly labeled, 6 mil thick, leak-tight, transparent, plastic bag used for containerizing ACWM for transportation and disposal. W. DEQ Identification Number: the accreditation number supplied by the administrative authority which authorizes a contractor/supervisor to manage an asbestos demolition or renovation project which involves regulated ACMs. X. Disposal Bag: A properly labeled 6 mil thick leak-tight plastic bag used for transporting asbestos waste from work site and to disposal site. Y. Encapsulant: A material that surrounds or embeds asbestos fibers in an adhesive matrix, to prevent release of fibers. a. Bridging Encapsulant: An encapsulant that forms a discrete layer on the surface of an in situ asbestos matrix. b. Penetrating Encapsulant: An encapsulant that is absorbed by the in situ asbestos matrix without leaving a discrete surface layer. Z. Encapsulation: Treatment of ACMs, with an encapsulant. AA. Enclosure: Construction of an air-tight, impermeable, permanent barrier around ACM to control the release of asbestos fibers into the air. BB. Facility: any institutional, commercial, public, industrial, or residential structure, installation, or building (including any structure, installation, or building cooperative, but excluding residential buildings having four or fewer dwelling units); any ship; and any active or inactive waste disposal site. CC. Filter: A media component used in respirators to remove solid or liquid particles from the inspired air. DD. Friable Asbestos Material: Material that contains more than 1.0% asbestos by weight and that can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure when dry. EE. Functional Space: A room, group of rooms, or homogeneous area (including crawl spaces or the space between a dropped ceiling and the floor or roof deck above), such as classroom(s), a cafeteria, gymnasium, or hallway(s), designated by a person accredited to prepare management plans, design abatement project, or conduct response actions. FF. Glove Bag: A sack (typically constructed of 6 mil transparent polyethylene or polyvinylchloride plastic) with inward projecting long sleeve gloves, which are designed to enclose an object from which an ACM is to be removed. GG. HEPA Filter: A High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filter capable of trapping and retaining 99.97% of asbestos fibers greater than 0.3 microns in diameter. SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE 01 10 40 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. HH. HEPA Filter Vacuum Collection Equipment (or Vacuum Cleaner): HEPA filtered vacuum collection equipment. II. Negative Pressure Respirator: A respirator in which the air pressure inside the inlet covering is positive during exhalation in relation to the air pressure of the outside atmosphere and negative during inhalation in relation to the air pressure of the outside atmosphere. JJ. Negative Pressure Ventilation System: A pressure differential and ventilation system. KK. Personal Monitoring: Sampling of the asbestos fiber concentrations within the breathing zone of an employee. LL. Polyethylene Sheet: A single polyethylene film in the largest sheet size possible to minimize seams, 4.0 or 6.0 mil thickness as indicated, clear, frosted, or black as indicated. Note: all polyethylene film used within the facility, for any purpose, will be rated polyethylene sheet. MM. Polyethylene Sheet, Rated: Provide flame-resistant polyethylene film that conforms to requirements set forth by the National Fire Protection Association Standard 701, Small Scale Fire Test for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films. Provide largest sheet size possible to minimize seams, 4.0 or 6.0 mil thickness as indicated, clear, frosted, or black as indicated. Note: all polyethylene film used within the facility, for any purpose, will be rated polyethylene sheet. NN. Pressure Differential and Ventilation System: A local exhaust system, utilizing HEPA filtration capable of maintaining a pressure differential with the inside of the Work Area at a lower pressure than any adjacent area, and which cleans recirculated air or generates a constant air flow from adjacent areas into the Work Area. OO. Protection Factor: The ratio of the ambient concentration of an airborne substance to the concentration inside the respirator at the breathing zone of the wearer. A measure of the degree of protection provided by a respirator to the wearer. PP. Repair: Returning damaged ACBM to an undamaged/intact condition to prevent fiber release. QQ. Respirator: A device designed to protect the wearer from the inhalation of harmful atmospheres. RR. Surfactant: A chemical wetting agent added to water to improve penetration, thus reducing the quantity of water required for a given operation or area. SS. Time Weighted Average (TWA): The average concentration of a contaminant in air during a specific time period. TT. Visible Emissions: Any emissions containing particulate asbestos material that are visually detectable without the aid of instruments. This does not include condensed uncombined water vapor. UU. WDE: Worker Decontamination Enclosure. VV. Wet Cleaning: The process of elimination asbestos contamination from surfaces and objects using cloths, mops, or other cleaning utensils which have been dampened with amended water or diluted removal encapsulant and, afterwards, thoroughly decontaminated or disposed of as ACWM. WW. Work Area: The area where asbestos-related work/removal operations are performed defined and/or isolated to prevent the spread of ACM dust, fibers or debris, and entry by unauthorized personnel. Work area is a Regulated Area as defined by 29 Code of Federal Regulations 1926.1101. 1.3 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND NOTICES Except to the extent that more explicit or more stringent requirements are written directly into the contract documents, all applicable codes, regulations, and standards have the same force and effect (and are made a part of the contract documents by reference) as if copied directly into the contract documents, or as if published copies are bound herewith. Make available for review at the site one copy of all applicable federal, state, county and city regulations governing the asbestos hazard response work, including but not limited to: A. General Requirements 1. All WORK under this contract shall be done in strict accordance with all applicable Federal, State, and Local regulations, standards, and codes governing asbestos hazard response and any other trade work done in conjunction with the asbestos hazard response action. 2. The most recent edition of any relevant regulation, standard or code shall be in effect. Where conflict among the requirements or with these specifications exists the most stringent requirements shall be utilized. 3. Copies of all standards, regulations, codes, and other applicable documents, including this specification shall be available at the worksite. Electronic media with on-site means to display this information is acceptable. 4. CONTRACTOR will initiate and file LDEQ Form AAC-2 and pay all ADVF fees. SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE 01 10 40 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. B. Specific Requirements – The citations noted below in no way alleviate the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to comply with all regulations pertinent to the conduct of his business. 1. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration a. Toxic and Hazardous Substances; Title 29, CFR, Section 1910.1000 b. Occupational Exposure to Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite; Final Rules Title 29, Part 1910, Section 1001 and Part 1926, Section 58 of the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). c. Respiratory Protection Title 29, Part 1910, Section 134 of the CFR. d. Construction Industry Title 29, Part 1926, of the CFR. e. Asbestos Standard for Construction Industry, Title 29, CFR, Section 1926.1101. f. Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records Title 29, Part 1910, Section 2 of the CFR. g. Hazard Communication Title 29, Part 1910, Section 1200 of the CFR. h. Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags Title 29, Part 1910, Section 145 of the CFR. i. Requirements for Scaffolding, Title 29, CFR, Section 1910.2. j. Requirements for Manually Propelled Ladders and Scaffolding, Title 29, CFR, Section 1910.29 k. Requirements for Manlifts, Title 29, CFR, Section 1910.68 2. DOT: U. S. Department of Transportation a. Hazardous Substances Title 29, Part 171 and 172 of the CFR. b. HM-181 of the CFR 100-199 effective October 1, 1993. 3. EPA: United States Environmental Protection Agency a. Asbestos Abatement Projects; Worker Protection Rule Title 40 Part 763, Sub-part G of the CFR. b. Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA) ACM in Schools Final Rule & Notice Title 40, Part 763, Sub-part E of the CFR. c. Training Requirements of (AHERA) Regulation ACM in Schools Final Rule & Notice Title 40, Part 763, Sub-part E, Appendix C of the CFR. d. Training Requirements of the Asbestos Model Accreditation Plan (MAP) in 40 CFR 763, Appendix C to Subpart E. e. National Emission Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) Emission Standard for Asbestos Title 40, Part 61, Sub-part A, and Sub-part M (Revised Sub-part B) of the CFR. f. Interim Transmission Electron Microscopy Analytical Methods – Mandatory and Nonmandatory – and Mandatory Section to Determine Completion of Response Actions, Title 40, Part 763, Sub-part E, Appendix A. 4. LDEQ: Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality a. An annual "Industrial Waste Hauler Permit" for ACM is required for transportation of ACM waste to disposal site. b. CONTRACTOR and all asbestos hazard response workers to be accredited by applicable federal, state, and local agencies and have current certificates in their possession. c. Written notification ten days prior to the removal of asbestos to the LDEQ and obtain the corresponding Asbestos Disposal Verification Form (ADVF), where applicable for the project. This form will be kept on site until such time as the asbestos waste is hauled to the disposal site. 5. Standards: a. American National Standards Institute SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE 01 10 40 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 1) Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems Publication Z9 2-79 2) Practices for Respiratory Protection Publication Z88 2-80 b. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1) Safety and Health Requirements Relating to Occupational Exposure to Asbestos Standard E 849-82 2) Specification for Encapsulants for Friable Asbestos Containing Building Materials Proposal P-189 6. EPA Guidance Documents a. Asbestos-Containing Materials in School Buildings - A Guidance Document. Part 1 & 2. (Orange Books) EPA C00090 (out of print) b. Guidance for Controlling ACM in Buildings (Purple Book) EPA 560/5-85-024 Friable ACM in Schools: Identification and Notification Rule (40 CFR Part 763) c. Evaluation of the EPA Asbestos-in-Schools Identification and Notification Rule. EPA 560/5-84-005. d. Asbestos Sampling. SOP#: 2015. 11/17/94 e. Asbestos in Buildings: National Survey of Friable ACM. EPA 560/5-84-006. f. Asbestos in Buildings: Guidance for Service and Maintenance Personnel. EPA 560/5-85-018. g. Asbestos Waste Management Guidance. EPA 530-SW-85-007. h. Asbestos Fact Book. EPA Office of Public Affairs. Asbestos in Buildings. Simplified Sampling Scheme for Friable Surfacing Materials. i. Commercial Laboratories with Polarized Light Microscopy Capabilities for bulk asbestos identification. j. A Guide to Respiratory Protection for the Asbestos Abatement Industry. EPA-560-OPTS-86-001. 1.4 SUBMITTALS AND NOTICES A. CONTRACTOR shall: 1. Prior to Commencement of WORK, submit to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT: a. Documentation of the current LDEQ Asbestos Contractor Supervisor and/or Worker accreditations for CONTRACTOR’s employees, including foremen, supervisors and any other company personnel or agents who may be exposed to airborne asbestos fibers or who may be responsible for any asbestos hazard response activities. b. Submit certification, signed by an officer of the CONTRACTOR’s organization, that all employees or agents who may be exposed to airborne asbestos in excess of background level are medically monitored to determine whether they are physically capable of working while wearing the respirator required without suffering adverse health effects. In addition, document that personnel have received medical monitoring as required in 29 CFR 1926.1101. c. Submit manufacturer’s certification that HEPA vacuums, negative pressure ventilation units, and other local exhaust ventilation equipment conforms to ANSI Z9.2-79. d. When rental equipment is to be used in WORK AREA, or to transport asbestos contaminated waste (ACWM), a written notification concerning intended use of the rental equipment must be provided to the rental agency with a copy submitted to the OWNER. e. Document NIOSH approvals for all respiratory protective devices used on site. f. Submit documentation of respirator fit-testing in accordance with OSHA requirements for all CONTRACTOR employees and agents who must enter the WORK AREA. g. File for, obtain, and submit Copies of LDEQ Form AAC-2 (Notification of Renovation and Demolition Activities) and ADVF forms issued to the Project. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for any and all costs associated with securing the necessary permits to complete the WORK. h. Identification of Disposal Facility(s) for ACM waste materials proposed for use by the CONTRACTOR. SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE 01 10 40 - 5 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 i. July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. Identification of the Transporter for ACM waste materials to the Disposal Facility(s) proposed for use by the CONTRACTOR. 2. During Asbestos Hazard Response Activities: a. Submit to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT copies of all ADVF’s for all ACWM removed from the site. b. Submit to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT on a weekly basis, copies of worksite entry logbooks with information on worker and visitor access, including name, time of entry, and departure, and if a visitor, the reason for the visit. c. Submit to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT on a weekly basis, logs documenting filter changes on respirators, HEPA vacuums, negative pressure ventilation units, and other engineering controls. d. Post, in the Clean Room area of the worker decontamination enclosure, a list containing the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of the CONTRACTOR’s key personnel who may be required to assist during asbestos hazard response activities. e. The CONTRACTOR’s Site SUPERINTENDENT will attend one progress meeting per week with the OWNER and the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. f. Submit weekly job progress reports detailing asbestos hazard response activities. Include review of progress with respect to previously established milestones and schedules, major problems, and action taken, injury reports, and equipment breakdowns. g. Submit results of OSHA compliant air sampling data. B. OWNER Shall: 1. Prior to Commencement of Work: a. Provide to the CONTRACTOR information concerning access, shutdown and protection requirements of certain equipment stored in the WORK AREA. 1.5 SECURTY AND ACCESS CONTROL A. WORK AREA 1. The WORK AREA is to be restricted only to authorized, trained, and protected personnel. These may include, but may not be limited to, the CONTRACTOR’s employees, employees of subcontractors, OWNER’s employees and representative, State and local inspectors and any other designated individuals. A list of authorized personnel shall be established prior to job start and posted on the Site 2. Access to each asbestos WORK AREA shall be positively controlled. All other means of access shall be blocked or locked so as to prevent entry to or exit from the WORK AREA. Emergency exits shall not be locked from the inside, but sealed with polyethylene sheeting and tape until needed. 3. CONTRACTOR shall have control of the WORK AREA during asbestos hazard response actions to protect work efforts, equipment, and quality assurance. 4. Entry into the WORK AREA by unauthorized individuals shall be reported immediately to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT by the CONTRACTOR. 5. A log book shall be maintained in the Clean Room area of the worker decontamination system. Anyone who enters the WORK AREA must record name, affiliation, time in, and time out for each entry. 6. CONTRACTOR will have OWNER’s assistance in enforcement of restricted access by OWNER’s employees. 1.6 EMERGENCY PLANNING A. Emergency planning shall be developed prior to asbestos hazard response activities and agreed to by the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER and the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. The Emergency Planning shall also be included in the Site Specific Safety Action Plan. SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE 01 10 40 - 6 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. B. Emergency procedures shall be in written form and prominently posed in the clean change area and equipment room of the worker decontamination area. Everyone, prior to entering the WORK AREA, must read and sign these procedures to acknowledge receipt and understand of work site layout, location of emergency exits and emergency procedures. C. Emergency planning shall include considerations of fire, explosion, toxic atmospheres, electrical hazards, slips, trips and falls, confined spaces and heat-related injury. D. Employee shall be trained in evacuation procedures in the event workplace emergencies. For active asbestos hazard response action workers: 1. For non-life threatening situations: Employees injured or otherwise incapacitated shall decontaminate following normal procedures with assistance from fellow workers, if necessary, before exiting the workplace to obtain proper medical treatment. 2. For life-threatening injury or illness: Worker decontamination shall take least priority after measures to stabilize the injured worker, remove him from the workplace and secure proper medical treatment. Contaminated casualties shall be prominently tagged or marked as “ASBETSOS CONTAMINATED” (as required) to alert medical personnel to the casualties status. E. Telephone numbers of all emergency response agencies/units shall be prominently posted in the clean change area and equipment room, along with the location of the nearest telephone. 1.7 PRE-START MEETING A. The CONTRACTOR shall attend a pre-starting job meeting as directed by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. B. At this meeting the CONTRACTOR shall provide all submittals as required elsewhere in this Section and Division 01, not already conveyed by the OWNER. In addition, he shall be prepared to provide detailed information concerning: 1. Preparation of the WORK AREA. 2. Employees who will participate in the Project, including delineation of experience, training, and assigned responsibilities during the Project. 3. Decontamination procedures for personnel, WORK AREA, and equipment. 4. Asbestos hazard response action methods and procedures to be used. 5. Procedures for handling and disposing of waste materials. 6. Procedures for final decontamination and cleanup. 7. Emergency procedures. 1.8 SUPPORT ACTIVITIES AND PERSONNEL A. Training: 1. Training shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR to all employees or agents who may be required to disturb ACM or asbestos-contaminated materials for abatement, asbestos hazard response, and auxiliary purposes and to all supervisory personnel who may be involved in planning, execution or inspection of the Project. This training shall comply with all applicable LDEQ and OSHA requirements. 2. The CONTRACTOR will, for the duration of the contract, be in complete compliance with LDEQ LAC 33:III2739 certification requirements for his company, employees, and agents. 1.9 MEDICAL MONITORING A. Medical monitoring must be provided by the CONTRACTOR to an employee or agent that will be working on Site during any phase of the asbestos hazard response activities or component removal process. At a minimum, medical monitoring must meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1101 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE 01 10 40 - 7 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 1.10 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. All sampling and analysis will be conducted in accordance with Section 01 41 00 Air Monitoring – Test Laboratory Services. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 10 40 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE 01 10 40 - 8 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 22 00 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (UNIT PRICES) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 SECTION INCLUDES A. Measurement and payment criteria applicable to portions of the Work performed under a unit price payment method. Specifically, this includes the limited replacement of thermal systems insulation (TSI) piping and elbows as necessary to complete the Work. Replacement is the preferred method for addressing deteriorated, friable, or significantly damaged TSI. B. Defect assessment and non-payment for rejected work. AUTHORITY A. Measurement methods delineated in the individual specification sections complement the criteria of this Section. In the event of conflict, the requirements of the individual specification section govern. B. Take all measurements and compute quantities. The ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will verify measurements and quantities. UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED A. Quantities indicated in the Contract Documents are for bidding and contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements supplied or placed in the WORK and verified by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT determine payment. B. If the actual WORK requires more or fewer quantities than those quantities indicated, provide the required quantities at the unit sum/prices contracted. MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES A. Measurement Devices: 1. Weigh Scales: Inspected, tested and certified by the applicable State Weights and Measures Department within the past year. 2. Platform Scales: Of sufficient size and capacity to accommodate the conveying vehicle. 3. Metering Devices: Inspected, tested and certified by the applicable State department within the past year. B. Measurement by Weight: Concrete reinforcing steel, rolled or formed steel or other metal shapes will be measured by handbook weights. Welded assemblies will be measured by handbook or scale weight. C. Measurement by Volume: Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width and height or thickness. D. Measurement by Area: Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius. E. Linear Measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at the item centerline or mean chord. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (UNIT PRICES) 01 22 01 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 F. 1.5 1.6 Stipulated Sum/Price Measurement: Items measured by weight, volume, area, or linear means or combination, as appropriate, as a completed item or unit of the Work. PAYMENT A. Payment Includes: Full compensation for all required labor, products, tools, equipment, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or installation of an item of the WORK; overhead and profit. B. Final payment for WORK governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities accepted by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT multiplied by the unit/sum price for WORK which is incorporated in or made necessary by the WORK. DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace the WORK, or portions of the WORK, not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, it is not practical to remove and replace the WORK, the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will direct one (1) of the following remedies: 1. 2. 1.7 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. The defective WORK may remain, but the unit sum/price will be adjusted to a new sum/price or reduced 50 percent at the discretion of the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. The defective WORK will be partially repaired to the instructions of the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, and the unit sum/price will be adjusted to a new sum/price or reduced 50 percent at the discretion of the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. C. The individual specification sections may modify these options or may identify a specific formula or percentage sum/price reduction. D. The authority of the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT to assess the defect and identify payment adjustment is final. NON-PAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS A. Payment will not be made for any of: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable. 2. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from the transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required WORK. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the WORK. 6. Loading, hauling and disposing of rejected Products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (UNIT PRICES) 01 22 01 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES A. Unit Price No. 1 - Replacement of 4” TSI piping Quantity – 100 Unit of Measurement – Linear Feet B. Unit Price No. 2 – Replacement of 4” TSI elbows Quantity – 10 Unit of Measurement – Each C. Unit Price No. 3 - Replacement of 6” TSI piping Quantity – 100 Unit of Measurement – Linear Feet D. Unit Price No. 4 – Replacement of 6” TSI elbows Quantity – 10 Unit of Measurement – Each E. Unit Price No. 5 - Replacement of 8” TSI piping Quantity – 100 Unit of Measurement – Linear Feet F. Unit Price No. 6 – Replacement of 8” TSI elbows Quantity – 10 Unit of Measurement – Each END OF SECTION MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (UNIT PRICES) 01 22 01 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 25 00 -SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by CONTRACTOR. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by CONTRACTOR that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. Substitutions for Cause are not allowed after the bid opening without approval for the OWNER. The OWNER will have authority in all instances. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the WORK and to construction performed by OWNER and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the WORK specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the WORK specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICCES if applicable. j. Detailed comparison of CONTRACTOR's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the WORK, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. k. CONTRACTOR's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. CONTRACTOR's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 2. Environmental Consultant's Action: If necessary, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will notify CONTRACTOR of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Environmental Consultant's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the WORK. b. Use product specified if ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Substitutions for Cause are not allowed after the bid opening without approval of the OWNER. The OWNER will have authority in all instances. Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will consider CONTRACTOR's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided for achieving LEED prerequisites and credits. c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect CONTRACTOR's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the WORK. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the WORK. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the WORK, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed. PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the WORK, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the WORK that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 14 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. Additional days will not be granted to perform Scope of Work if CONTRACTOR fails to submit Proposal Request within 14 days. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. Furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated CONTRACTOR's approved CPM construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail" or similar forms acceptable to submit to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. B. CONTRACTOR-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, CONTRACTOR may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change order to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the WORK. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated CONTRACTOR's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Proposal Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.6A, "Change Order Request (Proposal)," with attachments CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail" or similar form acceptable” Forms to submit to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS A. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 01 22 00 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work. 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On OWNER's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will issue a Change Order for signatures of OWNER and CONTRACTOR on AIA Document G701. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs CONTRACTOR to proceed with a change in the WORK, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the WORK. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. 2. Construction Change Directive to be capped with Not to Exceed costs established by the CONTRACTOR or ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 29 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by CONTRACTOR allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the WORK and used as the basis for reviewing CONTRACTOR's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of CONTRACTOR's construction schedule. Cost-loaded Critical Path Method Schedule may serve to satisfy requirements for the schedule of values. For reference, the A201 discusses the use of a G702/703 (Article 9.2 of the A201) and the SOV template in the Division 01 documents. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in CONTRACTOR's construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT at preconstruction meeting. 3. Submit the schedule of values to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT at earliest possible date, but no later than 14 days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 4. Sub-schedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the CONTRACTOR's construction schedule defines separate elements of the WORK, provide sub-schedules showing values coordinated with each element. 5. Additional Cost Estimating Services: Refer to requirements Section 01 10 00 Summary. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. No line item to exceed $50,000 in value unless a single piece of equipment exceeds this value. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. c. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's project number. d. CONTRACTOR's name and address. e. Date of submittal. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Related Specification Section or Division. Description of the Work. Name of subcontractor. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. Name of supplier. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment. 4) Overhead and profit. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of $50,000.00. 5. Include separate line items under CONTRACTOR and principal subcontracts for the following: a. LEED documentation and other Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount. 6. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. Rounded amounts are not permissible on Pay Applications. 7. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the WORK where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored on site, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance. 8. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the WORK. 9. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at CONTRACTOR's option. 10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT and paid for by OWNER. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. B. Payment Application Times: Monthly progress meeting with CONTRACTOR, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, and OWNER to obtain consensus on level of completion of WORK. Submit Application for Payment to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT within seven days of the scheduled monthly progress meeting. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month ending on the last day of the month. 1. Date for submittal of review copy of progress payment applications shall be the 25th of each month. C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of CONTRACTOR. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will return incomplete applications without action. All invoiced amounts shall not be rounded up. Use exact dollar amounts only. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and CONTRACTOR's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for WORK completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for WORK completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application only if approved for payment by Louisiana Department of Education (LDOE). 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration. Payment applications shall include the following: a. In addition to the three original AIA 701 and 702 Documents, submit an Excel version of same via email directly to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. b. Lien Waiver signed, stamped and certified. c. Progress Schedule updated in 8-1/2 x 11 format. d. Certified Payrolls both paper and electronic copies. e. Documentation and photographs of stored materials that is claimed on AIA 703. f. Daily sign-in logs. g. Daily construction logs. h. Copy of stamped contract recorded with the City of New Orleans and the receipt with the instrument number with the initial pay application only. i. Copy of the Substantial Completion Certificate recorded with the City of New Orleans with the final pay application only. j. Original Clear Lien and Privilege Certificate with the final pay application only. k. When any of the above items does not apply for a pay application, include a page with the item listed and indicate “Does not apply to this Pay Application”. l. Copies of all permits. (Initial Only) m. Dump and Recycled Waste haul tickets. (If applicable) n. Updated Waste Management Forms. (If applicable) 5. Append the following documentation to each Application for Payment: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Excel G703 spreadsheet. Updated project schedule. Lien waivers. Project photos. Certified payroll for contractors and subcontractors. Daily field reports. Adverse weather report. Dump and recycled waste haul ticket. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 i. j. k. l. m. July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. Updated waste management forms. LEED tracking documentation. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's meeting minutes. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANTs site visit reports. List of subcontractors that are to be paid with each billing, inclusive of amount to be paid. E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. No off-site storage of material is allowed. Material stored off-site will be rejected from the Payment Application. Verification of stored materials will be through end of billing cycle. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to OWNER, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment. F. Transmittal: Submit five signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment with supporting documents to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. All copies shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments as required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. 2. Submit one (1) compact disc containing electronic copies of all documentation. G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the WORK covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. OWNER reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the WORK must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms bound in Project Manual. H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Excel G703 spreadsheet. Lien Waiver. Progress Photos. Certified Payroll for all Contractors and Subcontractors. Daily Field Reports. Adverse Weather Report. Dump and Recycled Waste haul tickets. Updated Waste Management Forms. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT’s meeting minutes. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT’s site visit reports. List of subcontractors and material suppliers. Schedule of values. LEED submittal for project materials cost data. LEED action plans. CONTRACTOR's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). Combined CONTRACTOR's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Subcontractor to be presented within 60 days of Notice to Proceed. Products list (preliminary if not final). Schedule of unit prices. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). List of CONTRACTOR's staff assignments. List of CONTRACTOR's principal consultants. Copies of building permits. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. Initial progress report. Notice of Contract Recordation. Performance and payment bonds. Data needed to acquire Owner’s insurance. I. Monthly Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of each monthly Application for Payment include the following: 1. Excel G703 spreadsheet. 2. Lien Waiver. 3. Progress Photos. 4. Certified Payroll for all CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors. 5. Daily Field Reports. 6. Adverse Weather Report. 7. Dump and Recycled Waste haul tickets. 8. Updated Waste Management Forms. 9. Environmental Consultant’s meeting minutes. 10. Environmental Consultant’s site visit reports. 11. LEED submittal for project materials cost data. 12. LEED tracking data. 13. Updated CONTRACTOR's construction schedule. 14. Monthly narrative of work completed including the following: a. Current Request for Information Log b. Current Request for Change Log c. Current Submittal Log J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Environmental Consultant issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the WORK claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for OWNER occupancy of designated portions of the Work. 3. Include Notice of Substantial Completion Recordation. 4. Excel G703 spreadsheet. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 5 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. Lien Waiver. Progress Photos. Certified Payroll for all CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors. Daily Field Reports. Adverse Weather Report. Dump and Recycled Waste haul tickets. Updated Waste Management Forms. Environmental Consultant’s meeting minutes. Environmental Consultant’s site visit reports. LEED submittal for project materials cost data. LEED tracking data. Updated CONTRACTOR's construction schedule. Monthly narrative of work completed including the following: a. Current Request for Information Log b. Current Request for Change Log c. Current Submittal Log K. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements to include certification from CONTRACTOR and letter from Environmental Consultant verifying Work is complete. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "CONTRACTOR's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "CONTRACTOR's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when OWNER took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. 10. Notice of Substantial Completion Recordation. 11. Excel G703 spreadsheet. 12. Lien Waiver. 13. Final Photos. 14. Certified Payroll for all CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors. 15. Daily Field Reports. 16. Adverse Weather Report. 17. Dump and Recycled Waste haul tickets. 18. Updated Waste Management Forms. 19. Environmental Consultant’s meeting minutes. 20. Environmental Consultant’s site visit reports. 21. LEED submittal for project materials cost data. 22. LEED tracking data. 23. Updated CONTRACTOR's construction schedule. 24. Monthly narrative of work completed including the following: a. Current Request for Information Log b. Current Request for Change Log PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 6 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. c. Current Submittal Log PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 7 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 30 10 – SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the WORK, including: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. CONTRACTOR’s construction schedule. Submittal schedule. Daily construction reports. Product Data. Miscellaneous Submittals. B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division 1 Sections and other Contract Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Permits. Applications for payment. Performance and payment bonds. Insurance certificates. List of Subcontractors. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES NOTE: To expedite the submittal and submittal review process, all submittals and responses will be done electronically and in PDF format A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. 3. The ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. B. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of time required to process submittals, including time for re-submittals. SUBMITTALS 01 30 10 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 1. Allow one week for initial review. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. The ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will promptly advise the CONTRACTOR when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal. 3. Allow one week for reprocessing each submittal. 4. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT sufficiently in advance of the work to permit processing. C. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. 1. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken. a. b. c. d. e. Project name. Date. Name of CONTRACTOR. Name of manufacturer. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. D. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from CONTRACTOR to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT using a transmittal form. Submittals from sources other than the CONTRACTOR will be returned without action. 1. On the transmittal record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviation from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitation. Include CONTRACTOR’s certification that information complies with Contact Document requirements. E. See Submittal Guidance Checklist following this section 1.4 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Schedule: Provide proposed detailed schedule including work dates, work shift times, dates of start and completion including dates of preparation work, removals and final inspection dates. 1. Bar Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar chart type CONTRACTOR’s construction schedule. Submit within 3 days following CONTRACTOR’s Notice to Proceed date. a. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. b. Indicate Clearance of each WORK AREA in advance of the dates established for Clearance. Allow time for testing and other ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT procedures necessary for certification of Clearance. 2. Phasing: Provide notations on the schedule to show how the sequence of the WORK is affected by requirements for phased completion. 3. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the WORK, including testing and installation. Include indication of start and finish times for the following: a. b. c. d. e. SUBMITTALS Preparation of the WORK AREA. Asbestos hazard response actions. Moveable Item decontamination. Ceiling tile, VCT tile, mastic, and carpet removal. Specialized cleaning. 01 30 10 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. f. Clearance testing. g. Ceiling tile and VCT tile replacement. h. Substantial Completion 4. Area Separations: Provide a separate time bar to identify each WORK AREA or major construction area for each major portion of the work. Indicate where each element in an area must be sequenced or integrated with other activities. B. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT and the OWNER. 1. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. 1.5 PRODUCT DATA A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal. Product Data includes printed information such as manufacturer’s installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard wiring diagrams and performance curves. 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: a. b. c. d. Manufacturer’s printed recommendations. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. Application of testing agency labels and seals. 2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirement of the Contract Documents has been confirmed. 1.6 MISCELLANEOUS SUBMITTALS: A. Safety Data Sheet: Process Safety Data Sheets as “product data.” B. Records of Actual Work: Furnish records of actual work. C. Closeout Submittals: Refer to Section 01 71 10 Project Decontamination and to individual sections of these specification for specific submittal requirement of project closeout information D. Record Documents: Furnish set of original documents as maintained on the project site 1.7 ASBESTOS PROJECT DESIGNER AND/OR ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT ACTION A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is required or requested, the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. 1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility. 2. Action Stamp: The Asbestos Project Designer and/or ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked, as follows, to indicate the action taken: a. Final Unrestricted Release: Where submittals are marked “Approved”, that part of the WORK covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that compliance. SUBMITTALS 01 30 10 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. b. Final but Restricted Release: When submittals are marked “Approved as Noted”, that part of the WORK covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance. c. Returned for Re-submittal: When submittal is marked “Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit”, do not proceed with that part of the WORK covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark. 3. Do not permit submittals marked “Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit” to be used at the Project site, or elsewhere where work is in progress. 4. Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information or record purposes, special processing or other activity, the submittal will be returned, marked “Action Not Required.” PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable). ASBESTOS ABATEMENT SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST SUBMITTALS 01 30 10 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. The submittals required from the CONTRACTOR include, but are not limited to the following: Section 01 10 30 Summary of Work - Asbestos Hazard Response Before Start of Work: 1. Plan of Action 2. Pre- construction Inspection Section 01 10 40 Special Project Procedures, Asbestos Hazard Response Before Start of Work: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Contingency Plans Telephone Numbers Licenses and Accreditations Staff Names AAC-2(a) Permits Materials and Equipment Periodically During Work: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Copies of all completed ADVFs Daily Logs Event Reports Accident Reports Discovered Condition Reports Section 01 30 10 Submittals: Before Start of Work: 1. Contractors Construction Schedule Periodically During Work: 1. Record Documents Section 01 41 00 Air Monitoring - Test Laboratory Services None Section 01 50 30 Temporary Facilities and Services, Asbestos Before Start of Work: 1. Fire Extinguishers: product data, location schedule Periodically During Work: SUBMITTALS 01 30 10 - 5 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. None Section 01 51 30 Temporary Pressure Differential & Air Circulation System Before Start of Work: 1. HEPA Filtered Fan Units: Product data 2. Monitoring Equipment: Product data Periodically During Work: 1. Pressure Differential Monitoring Results 01 52 60 Temporary Enclosures Before Start of Work: 1. 2. 3. 4. Spray Cement: Product data Spray Cement: Manufacturer’s installation instructions Spray Cement: Safety Data Sheet Sheet Plastic: Test reports on NFPA 701 test Periodically During Work: None Section 01 56 00 Worker Protection - Asbestos Hazard Response Work Before Start of Work: 1. 2. 3. 4. LDEQ Accreditation: for each worker Certificate Worker Acknowledgement: for each worker Declaration of Medical Examination: for each worker Notarized Certifications Periodically During Work: None Section 01 56 20 Respiratory Protection Before Start of Work: 1. Product Data 2. NIOSH and MSHA Certification 3. Respiratory Protection Program: written manual Periodically During Work: None SUBMITTALS 01 30 10 - 6 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. Section 01 56 30 Decontamination Units Before Start of Work: 1. Wastewater Filters: product data Periodically During Work: None Section 01 71 10 Project Decontamination Before Start of Work: None Periodically During Work: 1. Fire Test on Lockdown Encapsulants used Section 01 71 20 Cleaning & Decontamination Procedures None Section 01 71 40 Work Area Clearance None Section 02 00 81 Removal of Asbestos-Containing Materials Before Start of Work: 1. Surfactant: product data. 2. Removal Encapsulant: product data. 3. Safety Data Sheet: for each surfactant and encapsulant Periodically During Work: None Section 02 00 83 Asbestos Hazard Response None Section 02 00 84 Disposal of Asbestos Containing Waste Material Before Start of Work: 1. Waste Transporter License 2. Name/address of landfill 3. Landfill contact person and telephone number SUBMITTALS 01 30 10 - 7 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. Periodically During Work: 1. On a weekly basis: copies of original ADVFs 2. As received, on a weekly basis: copies of completed ADVFs Section 09 08 05 Encapsulation of Residual ACM Contamination Before Start of Work: 1. Product Data 2. Installation Instructions 3. Safety Data Sheet Periodically During Work: 1. Notification of unsatisfactory substrate Section 23 02 54 Repair of ACM Pipe Insulation Before Start of Work: 1. 2. 3. 4. Insulation Cement: product data. Nonwoven Fibrous Glass Mat: product data Open Weave Glass Fiber Mat: product data Plastic Jackets: product data Periodically During Work: None END OF SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST END OF SECTION 01 30 10 SUBMITTALS 01 30 10 - 8 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. General coordination procedures. Coordination drawings. Requests for Information (RFIs). Project meetings. B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from OWNER, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, or CONTRACTOR seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the WORK, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A or similar form acceptable to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities – including at least one key officer and three project managers; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for OWNER and separate contractors if coordination of their WORK is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the WORK. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Preparation of CONTRACTOR's construction schedule. Preparation of the schedule of values. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. Delivery and processing of submittals. Progress meetings. Pre-installation conferences. Project closeout activities. Startup and adjustment of systems. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review. c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 2. Schedule: Submit and obtain ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT approval for all coordination drawings prior to submittal of structural steel shop drawings. Failure to furnish coordination drawings in a timely manner will delay approval of all related submittals. Such delays caused by failure to submit and obtain approval of coordination drawings shall not be cause for extension of contract time. B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the WORK. 2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related WORK. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components. 3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. 4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items. 6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following: a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems. b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork and slab penetrations. 7. Electrical Work: Show the following: a. b. c. d. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarm locations. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control center locations. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. 8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following: a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, valves, and sprinkler heads. 9. Review: ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will review coordination drawings to confirm that the WORK is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are CONTRACTOR's responsibility. If ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will so inform CONTRACTOR, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit. A. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements: 1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings. 2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using format same as file preparation format. 3. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will furnish CONTRACTOR one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. a. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings. b. CONTRACTOR shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106. 1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will return RFIs submitted to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT by other entities controlled by CONTRACTOR with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in CONTRACTOR's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Project name. Project number. Date. Name of CONTRACTOR. Name of ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. RFI number, numbered sequentially. RFI subject. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. CONTRACTOR's suggested resolution. If CONTRACTOR's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, CONTRACTOR shall state impact in the RFI. 12. CONTRACTOR's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. D. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's Action: ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's response for each RFI. RFIs received by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following CONTRACTOR-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. b. c. Requests for approval of submittals. Requests for approval of substitutions. Requests for approval of CONTRACTOR's means and methods. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 d. e. f. g. July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. Requests for interpretation of ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's actions on submittals. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT’s action may include a request for additional information, in which case ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for CONTRACTOR to submit Change Proposal according to Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If CONTRACTOR believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT in writing within 7 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Project name. Name and address of CONTRACTOR. Name and address of ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. RFI description. Date the RFI was submitted. Date ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's response was received. F. On receipt of ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT within seven days if CONTRACTOR disagrees with response. 1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Meetings will be held on site in a dry covered area with a table and chairs coordinated between the CONTRACTOR and the point of contact at the site. 2. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify OWNER and ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT of scheduled meeting dates and times. The meetings will be held every week on the same day and time. This will be agreed upon at the Pre-Construction Meeting. 3. Agenda: The CONTRACTOR will prepare the meeting agenda and distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including OWNER and ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to OWNER and ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 5 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of OWNER, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, and their consultants; CONTRACTOR and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the WORK. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. v. w. x. y. z. aa. Tentative construction schedule. Phasing. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. Designation of key personnel and their duties. Lines of communications. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. Procedures for RFIs. Procedures for testing and inspecting. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. Distribution of the Contract Documents. Submittal procedures. LEED requirements. Preparation of record documents. Use of the premises and existing buildings. Work restrictions. Working hours. OWNER's occupancy requirements. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. Procedures for moisture and mold control. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. Construction waste management and recycling. Parking availability. Office, work, and storage areas. Equipment deliveries and priorities. First Aid and CONTRACTOR's Safety Plan. Security. Progress cleaning. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. LEED Coordination Conference: ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will schedule and conduct a LEED coordination conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to OWNER, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, and CONTRACTOR. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of OWNER, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, and their consultants; CONTRACTOR and its superintendent and LEED coordinator; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the WORK. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect meeting requirements for LEED certification, including the following: a. b. c. d. LEED Project Checklist. General requirements for LEED-related procurement and documentation. Project closeout requirements and LEED certification procedures. Role of LEED coordinator. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 6 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. e. Construction waste management. f. Construction operations and LEED requirements and restrictions 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. D. Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. v. w. x. y. z. Contract Documents. Options. Related RFIs. Related Change Orders. Purchases. Deliveries. Submittals. LEED requirements. Review of mockups. Possible conflicts. Compatibility requirements. Time schedules. Weather limitations. Manufacturer's written instructions. Warranty requirements. Compatibility of materials. Acceptability of substrates. Temporary facilities and controls. Space and access limitations. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Testing and inspecting requirements. Installation procedures. Coordination with other work. Required performance results. Protection of adjacent work. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the WORK and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. E. Project Closeout Conference: ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to OWNER and ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 7 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 1. Conferees will review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of OWNER, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, and their consultants; CONTRACTOR and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the WORK. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. Preparation of record documents. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. Submittal of written warranties. Requirements for completing LEED documentation. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. Requirements for demonstration and training. Preparation of CONTRACTOR's punch list. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. Submittal procedures. OWNER's partial occupancy requirements. Installation of OWNER's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. F. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of OWNER, Project Manager, and ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT and its consultants, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the WORK. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. CONTRACTOR's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to CONTRACTOR's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) Interface requirements. Sequence of operations. Resolution of BIM component conflicts. Status of submittals. Deliveries. Off-site fabrication. Access. Site utilization. Temporary facilities and controls. Progress cleaning. Quality and work standards. Status of correction of deficient items. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 8 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. Field observations. Status of RFIs. Status of proposal requests. Pending changes. Status of Change Orders. Pending claims and disputes. Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. 4. Schedule Updating: Revise CONTRACTOR's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting G. Progress Meetings: ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will conduct progress meetings at monthly intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of OWNER and ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the WORK. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. CONTRACTOR's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to CONTRACTOR's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) Interface requirements. Sequence of operations. Resolution of BIM component conflicts. Status of submittals. Status of LEED documentation. Deliveries. Off-site fabrication. Access. Site utilization. Temporary facilities and controls. Progress cleaning. Quality and work standards. Status of correction of deficient items. Field observations. Status of RFIs. Status of proposal requests. Pending changes. Status of Change Orders. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 9 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise CONTRACTOR's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 10 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. 1.2 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1.3 CONTRACTOR's construction schedule. Construction schedule updating reports. Daily construction reports. Material location reports. Site condition reports. Special reports. DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Baseline Schedule: The CONTRACTOR’s initial CPM Progress Schedule presenting an orderly and realistic plan for completion of the entire Work of the Project. When reviewed and approved by the OWNER and ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, the Baseline Schedule becomes the initial version of the Official Progress Schedule. The Baseline Schedule is prepared in chart or graph format, consistent in all respects with the Contract Time(s) and order of Work, presented in sufficient detail to show the chronological relationship of all activities of the Project including but not limited to planned starting and completion dates of various activities, submittal of Shop Drawings and Product Data, procurement of materials and equipment, and deliveries of materials and equipment. C. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. D. CPM Progress Schedule: The CONTRACTOR’s Progress Schedule prepared in CPM Precedence format using the scheduling software required. E. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. F. Critical Path: The set or sequence of predecessor/successor activities which will take the longest time to complete. The duration of the critical path is the sum of the activities’ durations along the path. Thus, the critical path can be defined as the longest possible path through the “network” of project activities. The duration of the critical path represents the minimum time required to complete a project. Any delays along the critical path would imply that additional time would be required to complete the project. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. G. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. H. Float: The number of work/calendar days an activity can be delayed without impacting the project completion date. The Project “owns” float. I. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. J. Official Progress Schedule: The CONTRACTOR’s Progress Schedule and all revisions and updates thereto, reviewed and approved of by the OWNER, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. K. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either OWNER or CONTRACTOR, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. L. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. M. Recovery Schedule: CONTRACTOR’s detailed schedule indicating how CONTRACTOR intends to recover lost time. N. Revised Official Progress Schedule: A proposed Schedule submitted with the CONTRACTOR’s written request to revise the current version of the Official Progress Schedule. If the OWNER reviews and approves of the CONTRACTOR’s request to revise the Official Progress Schedule, it becomes the new current version of the Official Progress Schedule. O. Short Interval Schedule: The CONTRACTOR’s four-week schedule, updated weekly, showing the past week, the week submitted, and two weeks thereafter. The Short Interval Schedule must correlate with the current version of the Official Progress Schedule and reference the appropriate activity numbers. The Short Interval Schedule must indicate the actual start and finish dates of all activities on the Official Progress Schedule that are started or finished during the time period encompassed by the Short Interval Schedule. P. Updated Official Progress Schedule: The current version of the Official Progress Schedule updated monthly to include the actual start and finish dates of activities and the percentage of completion of each activity. Actual start and finish dates must be identical to the actual start and finish dates indicated on the CONTRACTOR’s Short Interval Schedule submissions. Q. Network Window: Also known as “fragnets” or “hammocks”, Network Windows must be provided as needed to ‘explode’ a section of the Official Progress Schedule to show the effects of proposed changes or delays to the schedule. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. 2. Two paper copies. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 3. Working electronic file. B. Startup construction schedule. 1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for costloaded activities. C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. D. CONTRACTOR's Construction Schedule: Provide all schedules, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using the most current version of Primavera Project. Planning Software to provide the CPM progress schedule and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label. 2. All CPM schedules must be provided using the Precedence Diagramming Method (PDM). E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. 4. Earnings Report: Compilation of CONTRACTOR's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed until most recent Application for Payment. F. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. G. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at intervals referenced in Section 2.4.A. H. Material Location Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. I. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. J. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event K. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist (Primavera) in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's request. B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and CONTRACTOR's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Review software applications and content and format for reports. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. Discuss constraints, including work stages interim milestones. Review delivery dates for OWNER-furnished products. Review schedule for work of OWNER's separate contracts. Review submittal requirements and procedures. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 9. Review time required for Project closeout and OWNER startup procedures, including commissioning activities. 10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule. 1.6 COORDINATION Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate CONTRACTOR's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. A. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of final completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 15 days, unless specifically allowed by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in CONTRACTOR's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 45 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. OWNER-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 01 10 00 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 3. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Coordination with existing construction. Limitations of continued occupancies. Uninterruptible services. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. Use of premises restrictions. Provisions for future construction. Seasonal variations. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. h. Environmental control. 4. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. Subcontract awards. Submittals. Purchases. Mockups. Fabrication. Sample testing. Deliveries. Installation. Tests and inspections. Adjusting. Curing. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 5. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion, and the following interim milestones: 1. 2. 3. 4. E. Structural completion. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. Permanent space enclosure. Completion of mechanical installation. Completion of electrical installation. Substantial Completion. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. Pile driving completion. Slab completion. Structural erection completion. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. See Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Unresolved issues. Unanswered Requests for Information. Rejected or unreturned submittals. Notations on returned submittals. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 5 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 G. 2.2 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which CONTRACTOR intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. General Requirements: 1. Personnel preparing CPM Progress Schedules must be qualified and experienced in using Primavera Project Planner software to prepare Critical Path Method (“CPM”) schedules and must be capable of producing the schedules and reports required by this Section. Within seven (7) Days after the official Contract start date stated in the Notice To Proceed CONTRACTOR must submit for OWNER review and approval, four (4) copies of the qualifications of CONTRACTOR’s proposed scheduler including references from the OWNER on the last three (3) recent projects where the proposed scheduler prepared the required project schedules. 2. CONTRACTOR must use scheduling software as required. 3. CONTRACTOR must provide OWNER with four (4) copies (plots) of each schedule submission and electronic copies of the schedule data files on Compact Disks (CDs). The CDs must be permanently labeled to indicate the contents of the CD and include the submittal number and data date. 4. The Project Time for completion of the entire Project and the Milestone times must adhere to the start and finish times stated in the Contract Documents, unless CONTRACTOR formally requests and OWNER’s Program Manager Approves in writing earlier (advanced) time(s) of completion. Approval of such request shall be at OWNER’s discretion and must be in the form of a Change Order. 5. Float is not for the exclusive benefit of either CONTRACTOR or OWNER. CONTRACTOR must not include contingency activities. 6. Failure of the Official Progress Schedule to include an element of the Work required for performance of this Contract, or inaccuracy in Official Progress Schedule, will not relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for accomplishing all the Work required and will not constitute grounds for delay. 7. Failure of CONTRACTOR to substantially comply with requirements of this Section 01320 will constitute a failure by CONTRACTOR to prosecute Work with such diligence as will ensure its completion within Contract Time(s) and may be considered grounds for termination or other remedy by OWNER pursuant to terms of this Contract. 8. Within seven (7) Days of the official Contract start date stated in the Notice to Proceed, OWNER and ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will conduct a Schedule Orientation Meeting to review the requirements of the Contract Documents for preparing, submitting, updating, and revising the various Project schedules. This is a separate meeting from the Preconstruction Conference and is dedicated exclusively to discussions about the scheduling requirements for the Project. 9. CONTRACTOR must review the requirements of the contract Documents related to scheduling prior to the meeting and be prepared to discuss its general approach to meeting the requirements. This meeting must be attended by: a. b. c. d. e. OWNER and ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT or designee. CONTRACTOR’s Authorized Representative and scheduler. CONTRACTOR’s QC Manager Representatives from Sub-contractors Any other personnel deemed advisable to attend by OWNER or CONTRACTOR. 10. The following items will be reviewed and discussed during the meeting: a. b. c. d. e. Qualifications of CONTRACTOR’s scheduler Schedule preparation and submission requirements Level of involvement of Sub-contractors in the schedule development effort Schedule updates Schedule revisions CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 6 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. Recovery Schedules Short Interval Schedules (SIS) Payment for Mobilization Establishing the time element of Change Orders Definable Features of Work Monthly Earnings Forecast Interface Flags County Holidays and Hours of Work Technical Scheduling Requirements Data exchange and communication B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. Preliminary Contract Schedule: 1. No later than twenty-one (21) Days after the start date for the Work stated in the Notice to Proceed, CONTRACTOR must submit five (5) prints (plots) of a Preliminary Contract Schedule. 2. The Preliminary Contract Schedule must be a time-scaled, precedence CPM diagram. The data/status date for the Preliminary Contract Schedule must be the first day of the Contract Time as stated in the NTP. 3. The Preliminary Contract Schedule must include: a. The CONTRACTOR’s general plan of Work in accordance with the Milestones and Project Time(s) stated in the Contract Documents. b. Details of CONTRACTOR’s planned mobilization. c. Sequence of early operations including procurement of materials and equipment for a minimum of ninety (90) Days from the official Contract start date stated in the Notice to Proceed. d. All mandatory activities, sequences, and durations required in the Contract Documents including but not limited to: 1. A start Milestone for the Notice to Proceed; 2. An activity for verification of all existing conditions and dimensions; 3. An activity for installation of temporary site enclosure fence; and 4. Submission of all pre-construction submittals. D. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will review the Preliminary Contract Schedule for conformance with the requirements of the contract Documents. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will return the Preliminary Contract Schedule with comments within twenty-one (21) Days after receipt. E. CONTRACTOR must use the OWNER reviewed and approved Preliminary Contract Schedule with OWNER’s comments as the basis for the Baseline Schedule submission. Unless otherwise requested by the CONTRACTOR and approved in writing by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, the activities, durations, and logic that appear in the OWNER reviewed and approved Preliminary Contract Schedule must remain unchanged in the Baseline Schedule submission. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format. B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 7 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 C. CPM Schedule: Prepare CONTRACTOR's construction schedule using a cost-and resource-loaded, time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D. July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse CONTRACTOR from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's approval of the schedule. Within sixty (60 Days from the official Contract start date stated in the Notice to Proceed, CONTRACTOR must submit a Baseline Schedule presenting an orderly and realistic plan for completion of the entire Work of the Project including consideration of and compliance with all Milestones, activity sequencing, activity durations, and other scheduling restrictions imposed by the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Baseline Schedule submittal must include four (4) schedule prints (plots) and corresponding electronic data files on Compact Disks (CDs). The CDs must be permanently labeled to indicate the contents of the CD and include the submittal number and data date. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. Preparation and processing of submittals. Mobilization and demobilization. Purchase of materials. Delivery. Fabrication. Utility interruptions. Installation. Testing and commissioning. Punch list and final completion. Activities occurring following final completion. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. 5. Cost-and Resource-Loading of CPM Schedule: Assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Do not assign costs to submittal activities. Obtain ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's approval prior to assigning costs to fabrication and delivery activities. Assign costs under main subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project record documents, LEED documentation, and demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 8 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. a. Each activity cost shall reflect an appropriate value subject to approval by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. b. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum. E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a timeimpact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. H. CONTRACTOR or subcontractor and the Work or activity. Description of activity. Main events of activity. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. Early and late start dates. Early and late finish dates. Activity duration in workdays. Total float or slack time. Average size of workforce. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values). Identification of activities that have changed. Changes in early and late start dates. Changes in early and late finish dates. Changes in activity durations in workdays. Changes in the critical path. Changes in total float or slack time. Changes in the Contract Time. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates. 1. 2. 3. 4. In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings. e. In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative value completed" with total at bottom. f. Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 2.4 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: CONTRACTOR and Sub-Contractors. Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site in a form prescribed and approved by OWNER and ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, for each day worked. The report must be delivered to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT at the jobsite the next workday by 10:00 a.m. At a minimum the report must include: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 9 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. List of separate contractors at Project site. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. Equipment at Project site. Material deliveries. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. Accidents. Meetings and significant decisions. Unusual events (see special reports). Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. Meter readings and similar recordings. Emergency procedures. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. Change Orders received and implemented. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. Services connected and disconnected. Equipment or system tests and startups. Partial completions and occupancies. Substantial Completions authorized. All workers by trade. Segregated worker activity for Force Account work (authorized via Undefinitized Change Order) Subcontractor activity Activity identification number(s) Cost Breakdown number(s) if a Basic Project Schedule is required Equipment on site Material deliveries Tests and Inspections performed Weather conditions Start of new activities and completion of activities Other significant items Jobsite sign-in sheets B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials: 1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. 3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage. C. 2.5 Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to OWNER or ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT within one (1) day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 10 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. by CONTRACTOR's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise OWNER in advance when these events are known or predictable. C. Procurement Status Log: 1. CONTRACTOR must submit for OWNER’s review and approval, four (4) copies of a Procurement Status Log and corresponding electronic data files transmitted to the Project Manager by electronic mail, of a Procurement Status Log not later than twenty-one (21) Days after the start date for the Work stated in the Notice to Proceed. 2. The Procurement Status Log must include: a. A complete list of items to be purchased that require review and approval by the OWNER of a Submittal. b. The Submittal tracking number from the Submittal Log that uniquely identifies the Submittal. c. The corresponding CPM activity identification number from the Preliminary Contract Schedule, Baseline Schedule, or Official Progress Schedule as available. d. The date the purchase order was placed or is anticipated to be placed. e. If the purchase order is placed, indicate the purchase order number, name of the Supplier, and Fabricator or Manufacturer of each item f. The time required by the vendor to prepare the Submittal g. The review and approval duration for the Submittal (21 Days) h. The anticipated duration of Fabrication/Manufacture i. The delivery duration j. The anticipated delivery date k. The actual delivery date 3. Each month, the Procurement Status Log must be updated and submitted with the Updated Official Progress Schedule or more frequently if requested by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. Submit four (4) copies of updated Procurement Log and corresponding electronic data files on Compact Disks (CDs). The CDs must be permanently labeled to indicate the contents of the CD and include the submittal number and data date. 4. If requested by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, CONTRACTOR must submit four (4) copies of each purchase order issued by CONTRACTOR or Subcontractors. D. Other Reports 1. CONTRACTOR must submit to OWNER, as specified or Directed, copies of all other reports required by the Contract Documents or other Governmental Agencies including but not limited to: a. b. c. d. e. Certified Payroll Hazardous Materials list(s) Copies of incident or accident and injury reports Force account Reports and Documentation Monthly Progress Payment Requests. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling. 1. In-House Option: OWNER may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if CONTRACTOR employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications. 2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact. B. CONTRACTOR's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals or as requested by OWNER and ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 11 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting or as requested by OWNER and ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. C. All Listed Sub-Contractors must sign a copy of the Baseline Schedule and provide a letter of transmittal indicating they have reviewed and accepted the Baseline Schedule. D. The Baseline Schedule submission must include and/or comply with the following minimum requirements: 1. Provide a time scaled, CPM schedule in precedence format, with the Critical Path highlighted. No more than 15% of activities can be critical or “near critical.” “Critical” is defined as having zero calendar days of Total Float, and “Near Critical” is defined as having 1-5 calendar days of Total Float. 2. Show the plan for completion of the Work for each Milestone within the time(s) specified. Each activity must be coded to its corresponding Milestone. 3. Provide a list identifying all imposed constraints (restraints). Activity constraints must be limited to constraints Imposed by the Contract Documents unless otherwise specifically approved in writing by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 4. Activity Calendars: a. Indicate all activity calendars used. b. All activity calendar(s) must identify workdays, holidays, and shift work (by trade). c. All activity calendar(s) must include: 1. All work hour restrictions including but not limited to CEQA requirements, anticipated Weather delays, as defined in AIA Document A201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and restriction imposed by local Governmental Agencies. 2. All workday activity calendars must have the same holidays unless approved in writing by the project Manager 3. All activity calendars must cover entire Contract Time 4. The global seven-day/week activity calendar must have no non-work days. d. Each Activity must be assigned to the appropriate Activity Calendar. 5. All completion Milestones required by the Contract documents must be shown on the specific Milestone completion date(s) identified in the Contract Documents and must be attached to a seven-day/week activity calendar. The seven-day/week activity calendar must have no non-work days. 6. Include dependencies (relationships) and logic ties between activities. 7. Open-ended activities are not permitted. 8. Unless otherwise approved in writing by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT and OWNER, no single activity on the schedule shall have a duration longer than fifteen (15) days, except for fabrication, procurement, Punch List, and equipment commissioning (run-in) activities. 9. Schedules which show negative float will not be accepted by the OWNER, nor will negative float be a basis for time extensions for Change Order activities, except for those activities shown on the Critical Path. 10. Float is owned by the Project. Float is administered by the OWNER. No time extensions to the Contract time will be granted, nor delay damages paid, unless a delay occurs which impacts the Critical Path and consumes all available Float. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 12 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 11. Activity durations shall be the total number of actual days required to perform each activity. The consideration of weather impact on completion of the Work must be included in the associated activity calendar and not included in individual activity durations. 12. No single activity shall have more than one Sub-contractor responsible for its performance. 13. Each Activity will include (1) a description of what work is occurring, and where; (2) Calendar day duration; and (3) Responsibility code to identify who performs the activity. 14. For Sub-contractor activities, include a responsibility code for each activity corresponding to the Sub-contractor responsible for performing the Work. 15. Unless otherwise specifically approved in writing by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT and OWNER, if the start of an activity depends on the OWNER’s review and approval of a Submittal(s), identify as two (2) separate preceding activities the preparation and review of the Submittal(s). 16. Unless a longer period is specifically stated in the Contract Documents, OWNER will have a minimum of 15 Days to review Complete Submittals. 17. Do not schedule activities that are dependent on Submittal acceptance or material delivery to start earlier than the expected approval or delivery dates. 18. Identify as separate activities procurement of major equipment and materials. At a minimum, procurement of major equipment and materials must include the following five (5) dependent activities: a. Place purchase order b. Prepare Submittal c. Review and accept Submittal d. Fabricate/Manufacture e. Delivery 19. Identify as separate activities the installation of all OWNER Furnished, CONTRACTOR Installed items. If CONTRACTOR requires product installation information for OWNER Furnished Items, include specific interface flags indicating when product installation information is required. If required, include activities for all equipment/systems Performance Period(s). Performance Period activities must occur after operational testing is completed and before CONTRACTOR certifies the Work of the Milestone is complete. 20. Include individual activities for the final cleanup effort associated with each Milestone and the final cleanup of the entire Project. Final cleanup activities must be shown occurring prior to CONTRACTOR’s Milestone and contract completion inspection requests. 21. Include activities for CONTRACTOR completion certification for each Milestone and Project Completion Certification. 22. Include activities and indicate the number of Days allowed for the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT and OWNER to prepare Punch lists. 23. Show the number of days needed by the CONTRACTOR to correct deficiencies in the completed Work (Punch list durations) after receipt of Punch list from OWNER and ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 24. CONTRACTOR’s Punch list activities must be shown as starting no earlier than CONTRACTOR’s receipt of OWNER and ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT prepared Punch List. 25. Include interface flags for all points of coordination with the work of other Contractors engaged by OWNER at the Project Site. 26. With the Baseline Schedule Submission, CONTRACTOR must submit a monthly earnings forecast indicating the CONTRACTOR’s estimated per month and cumulative-to-date billings to the OWNER over the entire Contract Time. Submit four (4) paper copies and corresponding electronic data files on Compact Disks (CDs). The CDs must be permanently labeled to indicate the contents of the CD and include the submittal number and data date. 27. The data/status date for the Baseline Schedule must be the first day of the Contract Time as stated in the NTP. 28. 30. Show each Milestone required by the Contract Documents as independent. Do not tie (link) milestones together. 29. All Milestones required by the Contract Documents must be shown on the specific Milestone completion date identified in the Contract Documents and must be attached to a seven-day activity calendar. 30. Include a Project start milestone for the Notice to Proceed (NTP) CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 13 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 31. Unless otherwise requested by the CONTRACTOR and approved in writing by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT and OWNER, the activities, durations, and logic that appear in the OWNER reviewed and approved Preliminary Contract Schedule must remain unchanged in the Baseline Schedule submission. 32. Activities must be included for all required reviews, approvals, permits, and inspections performed by or issued by regulatory agencies. 33. Activities must be included for final submission of Record Documents (as-built Drawings and Project Manual) and other key closeout activities. 34. Each activity must be coded to its associated Definable Feature of Work (DFOW). 35. CONTRACTOR shall not use Start-to-Finish (SF) relationships between activities unless sequence of work requires this relationship of activities. E. If OWNER provides Activity ID guidelines, Activity Code requirements, or activity Interface Flag requirements to the CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR must comply with these requirements and restrictions. F. Each Sub-contractor must submit on their company letterhead a statement certifying he/she has reviewed the CONTRACTOR’s Baseline Schedule and it accurately represents: 1. The Sub-contractor’s plan for their portion of the Work 2. The planned durations for the Sub-contractor’s activities G. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT and OWNER will review the Baseline Schedule submission for conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Within twenty-one (21) Days after receipt, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT and OWNER will review and approve the Baseline Schedule or will return it with comments. If the Baseline Schedule is returned with comments, CONTRACTOR must revise the schedule to incorporate the comments and resubmit within seven (7) Days. H. Official Progress Schedule: 1. 2. I. The OWNER approved Baseline Schedule becomes the initial version of the Official Progress Schedule. The Official Progress Schedule must not be revised without the prior written Approval of the OWNER’s Project Manager. Monthly Update of the Official Progress Schedule: 1. CONTRACTOR must submit a monthly update to the Official Progress Schedule. All updates must be submitted with four (4) prints (plots) of the Updated Official Progress Schedule and corresponding electronic data files on compact disks (CDs). The CDs must be permanently labeled to indicate the contents of the CD and include the submittal number and data date. 2. The submission of the Updated Official Progress Schedule must coincide with the submission of the monthly progress payment request. 3. The Updated Official Progress Schedule must include: a. CONTRACTOR’s estimated percentage complete for each activity not yet complete. b. Actual start/finish dates for each activity. 4. The Updated Official Progress Schedule must not include: a. Added or deleted activities b. Changes to the network logic c. Any other changes, revisions or modifications of any kind. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 14 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 5. OWNER and ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will meet with CONTRACTOR at the Project Site to verify the CONTRACTOR’s estimate of the percentage complete for each activity not yet complete. If agreement cannot be reached on the actual progress for any activity, determination of OWNER and ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will be used. 6. If, during the updating process, it is discovered that actual progress is posted against out-of sequence activities, before submission of the next Updated Official Progress Schedule, CONTRACTOR must submit a Revision Request to the OWNER, revising the schedule logic to be consistent with the actual progress and sequence of the Work. The scheduling software must not be configured to override schedule logic (progress override) when calculating activities that were performed out of sequence. The schedule logic in the current version of the Official Progress Schedule must be retained during all calculations of the updated schedule. 7. Each month CONTRACTOR must submit four (4) copies of a monthly report: a. The monthly report must include: 1. A description of problem areas 2. Current and anticipated delaying factors and their impact b. The CONTRACTOR’s monthly report must be submitted within 3 days after the payment period end date. 8. Special Reports a. OWNER may request, from month-to-month, any two of the following special reports: 1. Total Float Time sorted from least to most 2. Activities sorted by early start. 3. Activities sorted by late start 4. Activities grouped by Sub-contractor, selected trades or buildings. 5. Activities with scheduled early start dates in a given time frame (i.e. 30-day or 60-day outlook). 6. A manpower report based on actual person hours per month and compared to total planned person hours per month for early start and late start of the activities. J. Revised Official Progress Schedule: 1. A revised Official Progress Schedule must be submitted by the CONTRACTOR whenever the CONTRACTOR desires to change its sequence or method of construction, add or delete activities, change logic ties or constraints (restraints), modify cost or resource loading, incorporate Approved Change Orders into the schedule, or whenever Directed by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 2. All revision requests must be in writing, must explain in narrative why each activity change or revision is being requested, and must be based on the most recent OWNER approved Updated Official Progress Schedule. 3. When out of sequence activities appear in the Updated Official Progress Schedule, CONTRACTOR must submit a Revised Official Progress Schedule. The Revised Official Progress Schedule must incorporate a revised schedule logic that confirms to current job status. 4. All Revised Official Progress Schedule revision requests must be submitted with four (4) prints (plots) of the requested. 5. If the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT reviews and approves the Revised Official Progress Schedule, it will become the new current versions of the Official Progress Schedule. 6. If OWNER provides additional Interface Flag requirements to the CONTRACTOR for the purpose of coordinating the CONTRACTOR’s schedule with the Schedules of other Contractors or the OWNER’s master Project Schedule, CONTRACTOR must revise their schedule to incorporate the Interface Flags at no additional cost to the OWNER. 7. Activity IDs and Activity Descriptions must not be revised. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 15 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 8. Original Activity Durations must not be revised. The remaining Duration for an Activity can be updated to indicate the time required to complete the Activity 9. When the schedule is revised to Incorporate Change Order activities, each Change Order must have its own discrete activities. The sum of the values of the activities for each Change Order shown on the Official Progress Schedule must equal the dollar value of the change Order. K. Short Interval Schedule: 1. An updated Short Interval Schedule (SIS) must be submitted to the OWNER at each Progress Meeting. Each attendee at the Progress Meeting must be provided One (1) copy of the SIS. 2. The Short Interval Schedule must be submitted throughout the entire Contract Time. 3. The Short Interval Schedule must be a four-week schedule and include the past week, the week submitted, and two weeks thereafter. 4. The Short Interval Schedule must contain sufficient detail to evaluate daily progress and manpower/equipment loading and must correlate with the current version of the Official Progress Schedule and reference the appropriate activity numbers. 5. The Short Interval Schedule must indicate all planned and actual tests and inspections. 6. The Short Interval Schedule must indicate the actual start and finish dates for each activity on the Official Progress Schedule that started or finished during the time period covered by the Short Interval Schedule. L. Recovery Schedule: 1. If any activity falls more than fourteen (14) Days behind schedule, upon OWNER’s request, CONTRACTOR must submit a Recovery Schedule within seven (7) Days indicating how CONTRACTOR intends to make up the lost time. Form and detail of the Recovery Schedule must be appropriate to explain and display how CONTRACTOR intends to reschedule delinquent activities to regain compliance with the Contract Time(s). Submit four (4) copies (plots) and corresponding electronic data files on Company Disks (CDs). The CDs must be permanently labeled to indicate the contents of the CD and include the submittal number and data date. 2. If the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT reviews and approves the CONTRACTOR’s Recovery Schedule, CONTRACTOR must submit a Revised Official Progress Schedule revision request as required by Section 3.07 above. The Revised Official Progress Schedule must be based on and limited to the modifications indicated in the Recovery Schedule and approved by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. M. Time Extensions: 1. CONTRACTOR must submit four (4) copies and corresponding electronic data files on Compact Disks (CDs) of a detailed network window, for each delay giving rise to the CONTRACTOR’s request for a time extension, indicating the impact of the delay on the Project Time(s). The network window must be based on the Updated Official Progress Schedule in effect at the time the delay or impact first occurred. The CDs must be permanently labeled to indicate the contents of the CD and include the submittal number and data date. 2. No time extensions to the Contract time will be granted, nor delay damages paid, unless a delay occurs which impacts the Critical Path and consumes all available Float. 3. If the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT approves a time extension request, a Change Order extending the Contract Time will be issued. 4. Upon receipt of an executed Change Order, modifying the Contract Time, or earlier if directed in writing by the OWNER, CONTRACTOR must submit a request for revision to the Official Progress Schedule. The revision request must be based on and limited to the modifications to the Contract Time identified in the Change Order. Submit four (4) copies and corresponding electronic data files on compact disks (CDs). The CDs must be permanently labeled to indicate the contents of the CD and include the submittal number and data date. 5. OWNER is not obligated to consider time extension requests unless the requests are made in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 16 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 N. July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. Submittal Log: 1. Within twenty-one (21) Days after the Contract start date stated in the Notice to Proceed, CONTRACTOR must submit. Submittal Log must be prepared in accordance with the requirements. 2. Unless otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, no Submittal shall show an OWNER’s review and return duration of less than fifteen (15) Days. 3. OWNER may refuse to take action on any Submittal without prior receipt, review, and approval of the Submittal Log. 4. Submittals must indicate the corresponding activity numbers on the CONTRACTOR’s Preliminary Contract Schedule. 5. Each week, on a day agreed to between CONTRACTOR and ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, CONTRACTOR must review the Submittal Log with the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. If requested by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT prior to the weekly meeting, CONTRACTOR must provide the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT with one (1) copy of an updated Submittal Log and corresponding electronic data files on Company Disks (CDs) indicating the current status of all required Submittals. The CDs must be permanently labeled to indicate the contents of the CD and include the submittal number and data date. 6. The updated Submittal log must be grouped by Definable Feature of Work and include, at a minimum, the following information for all Submittals and resubmittals: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. A unique Submittal tracking number Description of the Submittal Date required by Contract Documents for submission of Submittal to OWNER OWNER’s Distribution Group (OWNER’s parallel reviewers) Total number of Copies for Submittal required to be submitted to OWNER’s reviewers Anticipated date CONTRACTOR will receive Submittal Information from Subcontractor/Supplier. Actual date CONTRACTOR received Submittal Information from Subconstruction Contractor/Supplier. Anticipated Date for Submission to OWNER Actual Date Transmitted to OWNER OWNER Review Time allowed by Contract documents (No less than 15 Days) Cross reference to corresponding activity number on CONTRACTOR’s Progress Schedule Project Manual section(s) requiring submission of Submittal Actual date when CONTRACTOR received Submittal(s) back from OWNER OWNER’s action on Submittal (No Exceptions Taken, Make Corrections Noted, Revise and Resubmit, or Rejected) o. Submittal Type (Type 1 or Type 2) p. Submittal Designation q. Definable Feature of Work (DFOW) r. Comments/Remarks 7. After approval of the CONTRACTOR’s Submittal Log by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, must make all Submittals in accordance with the “Anticipated Date for Submission to OWNER” indicated in the Log. OWNER has the right to return all Submittals to the CONTRACTOR “Returned Without Review,” if the Submittal is submitted prior to the “Anticipated Date for Submission to OWNER.” O. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, OWNER, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by CONTRACTOR with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 17 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. END OF SECTION 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 18 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 32 33 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. 3. Final completion construction photographs. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation. B. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs. 1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels. 2. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file. 3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag: a. b. c. d. e. f. Name of Project. Name and contact information for photographer. Name of ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. Name of CONTRACTOR. Date photograph was taken. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Photographer Qualifications: The CONTRACTOR may self-perform this task. 1.5 USAGE RIGHTS A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. C. Neighborhood Inspection Plan: Incorporate Owner's Neighborhood Inspection requirements in submittal of preconstruction, periodic construction, and final completion construction photographs. D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of WORK, take photographs of Project site (interior, specifically) including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take photographs weekly, with timing each month adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. F. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT-Directed Construction Photographs: From time to time, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will instruct photographer about number and frequency of photographs and general directions on vantage points. Select actual vantage points and take photographs to show the status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. G. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 50 color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as project record documents. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will inform photographer of desired vantage points 1. Do not include date stamp. H. Additional Photographs: ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT may request photographs in addition to periodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order and are not included in the Contract Sum. 1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible. 2. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request. 3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. b. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances. c. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. END OF SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and CONTRACTOR's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of CONTRACTOR's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. b. c. d. e. Scheduled date for first submittal. Specification Section number and title. Submittal category: Action; informational. Name of subcontractor. Description of the Work covered. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 f. g. h. i. j. July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. Scheduled date for ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's final release or approval. Scheduled date of fabrication. Scheduled dates for purchasing. Scheduled dates for installation. Activity or event number. 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT for CONTRACTOR's use in preparing submittals. 1. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will furnish CONTRACTOR one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings. a. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. CONTRACTOR shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106, Digital Data Licensing Agreement. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will advise CONTRACTOR when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT and to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT before being returned to CONTRACTOR. D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record CONTRACTOR's review and approval markings and action taken by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic project management software or other electronic form acceptable to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, containing the following information: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. Project name. Date. Name and address of ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. Name of CONTRACTOR. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. Category and type of submittal. Submittal purpose and description. Specification Section number and title. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. Related physical samples submitted directly. Indication of full or partial submittal. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. Other necessary identification. Remarks. 5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata: a. b. c. d. Project name. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. Manufacturer name. Product name. E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on CONTRACTOR's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's action stamp. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's action stamp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Action Submittals: Where paper copy submittals are indicated, submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will return two copies. 3. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. Manufacturer's product specifications. Standard color charts. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. Testing by recognized testing agency. Application of testing agency labels and seals. Notation of coordination requirements. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. b. c. d. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. Printed performance curves. Operational range diagrams. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Identification of products. Schedules. Compliance with specified standards. Notation of coordination requirements. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches , but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. b. Three opaque copies of each submittal. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. b. c. d. e. Generic description of Sample. Product name and name of manufacturer. Sample source. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as OWNER's property, are the property of CONTRACTOR. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 5 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit two full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will return submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by CONTRACTOR if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." G. CONTRACTOR's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation." H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures." I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements." J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures." K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANTs and OWNERs, and other information specified. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 6 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Name of evaluation organization. Date of evaluation. Time period when report is in effect. Product and manufacturers' names. Description of product. Test procedures and results. Limitations of use. U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. 2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of CONTRACTOR by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 7 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to CONTRACTOR to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of CONTRACTOR's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. D. Submittals are required by the CONTRACTOR to be distributed to the Owner in PDF format after they are returned by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT to the CONTRACTOR. This includes submittal, returned with further action required by the CONTRACTOR, i.e. Revise and Resubmit, Rejected, etc. 3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. B. Informational Submittals: ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT without action. 3.3 DISTRIBUTION TO OWNER A. Action Submittals: Distribute electronic copies to Owner upon receipt of returned copies from ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, indicating ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's stipulated actions required. B. Informational Submittals: Distribute electronic copies to Owner upon submittal to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. Distribute electronic copies of responses from ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, if any, to Owner. C. Closeout Submittals: Refer to Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures." D. Maintenance Material Submittals: Refer to Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 8 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for all testing. The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for any corrections that are required due to testing. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit CONTRACTOR's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for CONTRACTOR to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, OWNER, Commissioning Authority, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 1. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies. 2. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: CONTRACTOR or another entity engaged by CONTRACTOR as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. J. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). K. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction. 1. 2. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. CONTRACTOR's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities. B. Qualification Data: For CONTRACTOR's quality-control personnel. C. CONTRACTOR's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting system qualityassurance plan prepared by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. Description of test and inspection. Identification of applicable standards. Identification of test and inspection methods. Number of tests and inspections required. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. Requirements for obtaining samples. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out CONTRACTOR's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with CONTRACTOR's construction schedule. B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project. 1. Project quality-control manager shall not have other Project responsibilities. C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review. D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following: 1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections. a. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections.” b. OWNER-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents, including tests and inspections indicated to be performed by the Commissioning Authority. E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups. F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring non-conforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Date of issue. Project title and number. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Identification of product and Specification Section. Complete test or inspection data. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For OWNER's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. CONTRACTOR responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar qualityassurance service to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT and Commissioning Authority, with copy to CONTRACTOR. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 2. Notify ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 5 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 5. Obtain ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 1) Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 2) Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. L. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup as indicated on Drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for which mockups are required in individual Specification Sections, along with supporting materials. 1.9 QUALITY CONTROL A. OWNER Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as OWNER's responsibility, OWNER will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. OWNER will furnish CONTRACTOR with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to CONTRACTOR, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. CONTRACTOR Responsibilities: Tests and inspections are CONTRACTOR's responsibility. Perform additional qualitycontrol activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of CONTRACTOR by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Where services are indicated as CONTRACTOR's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. CONTRACTOR shall not employ same entity engaged by OWNER, unless agreed to in writing by OWNER. 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as CONTRACTOR's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 5. Testing and inspecting requested by CONTRACTOR and not required by the Contract Documents are CONTRACTOR's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect fieldassembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in pre-installation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 6 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. E. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were CONTRACTOR's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, Commissioning Authority and CONTRACTOR in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, Commissioning Authority, and CONTRACTOR promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through CONTRACTOR. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of CONTRACTOR. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of CONTRACTOR's quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with CONTRACTOR's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to OWNER, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, Commissioning Authority, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.10 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified special inspector as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections and in Statement of Special Inspections prepared for this Project, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 7 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 2. Notifying ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, Commissioning Authority, and CONTRACTOR promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT and Commissioning Authority with copy to CONTRACTOR and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and re-inspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Date test or inspection was conducted. Description of the Work tested or inspected. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's, Commissioning Authority's, reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01 73 00 "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are CONTRACTOR's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for qualitycontrol services. END OF SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 8 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 41 00 – AIR MONITORING – TEST LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Air Monitoring during WORK AREA CLEARANCE ACTIVITIES is described in Section 01 71 40 Work Area Clearance Activities, with the exception of potential interim OSHA Clearances described below. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK A. Not in Contract Sum. This Section describes work being performed by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. This work is not in the Contract Sum. B. This Section describes air monitoring carried out by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT to verify that the building beyond the WORK AREA and the outside environment remain uncontaminated by airborne asbestos fibers. This Section also sets forth airborne fiber levels both inside and outside the WORK AREA as action levels, and describes the action(s) required by the CONTRACTOR if an action level is met or exceeded. C. CONTRACTOR’s personnel air monitoring required by OSHA is work of the CONTRACTOR and is NOT covered in this Section. 1.3 AIR MONITORING A. WORK AREA Isolation: The purpose of the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT’s air monitoring is to detect faults in the WORK AREA isolation structures and procedures such as: 1. 2. 3. 4. Contamination of the building outside of the WORK AREA with airborne asbestos fibers. Failure of filtration system or rupture(s) in the differential pressure system. Contamination of the air outside building envelope with airborne asbestos fibers. Excessive WORK AREA interior airborne fiber concentrations that present an undue potential contamination hazard to other areas of the building and/or surrounding environment. Should any of the above occur, immediately cease asbestos hazard response activities until the fault is corrected. Do not recommence work until authorized by the OWNER. B. WORK AREA Airborne Fiber Count: The ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will monitor fiber concentrations in and around the WORK AREA. The purpose of this ambient air monitoring will be to detect airborne asbestos fiber concentrations which may challenge the ability of the WORK AREA isolation procedures to protect the balance of the building or the surrounding environment from contamination by airborne asbestos fibers. C. WORK AREA CLEARANCE ACTIVITIES: To determine if the elevated airborne fiber counts encountered during asbestos hazard response operations have been reduced to an acceptable level, the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will sample and analyze air per Section 01 71 40 Work Area Clearance Activities. 1. The ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will be conducting ambient air monitoring throughout the course of the Project. AIR MONITORING – TEST LABORATORY SERVICES 01 41 00 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 1.4 STOP ACTION LEVELS A. Inside WORK AREA: Maintain an average airborne fiber count in the WORK AREA of less than 0.5 fibers per cubic centimeter (f/cc). If the fiber counts rise above this figure for any sample taken, revise work procedures to lower fiber counts. If the Time Weighted Average (TWA) fiber count for any work shift of 8-hour period exceeds 0.5 f/cc, stop all work, leave Pressure Differential System in operation and notify ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. After correcting the cause(s) of high fiber levels, do not recommence work for 24 hours unless otherwise authorized, in writing, by the OWNER. 1. If airborne fiber counts exceed 2.0 f/cc for any period of time, cease all work except corrective action until fiber counts fall below 0.5 f/cc and notify ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. After correction cause of high fiber levels, do not recommence work for 24 hours unless otherwise authorized, in writing, by the OWNER. B. Outside WORK AREA: If any air sample taken outside of the WORK AREA exceeds the base line established below, immediately and automatically stop all WORK except corrective action. The ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will determine the source of the high reading and so notify the CONTRACTOR in writing. 1. If the high reading was the result of a failure of WORK AREA isolation measures initiate the following actions: a. Immediately erect new critical barriers as set forth in Section 01 52 60 Temporary Enclosures to isolate the affected area from the balance of the building. Erect Critical Barriers at the next existing structural isolation of the involved space. b. Decontaminate the affected area in accordance with Section 01 71 20 Cleaning & Decontamination Procedures. c. Require that respiratory protection as set forth in Section 01 56 20 Respiratory Protection by worn in affected area until the area is cleared for occupancy in accordance with Section 01 71 40 Work Area Clearance Activities. d. Leave Critical Barriers in place until completion of WORK and insure that the operation of the pressure differential system in the WORK AREA results in a flow of air from the balance of the building into the affected area. e. If the exit from the Clean Room of the Personnel Decontamination Unit enters the affected area, establish a decontamination facility consisting of a Shower Room and Changing Room as set forth in Section 01 56 30 Decontamination Units at entry point to affected area. f. After Certification of Visual Inspection in the WORK AREA, remove critical barrier separating the WORK AREA from the affected area. Final air samples will be taken within the entire area as set forth in Section 01 71 40 Work Area Clearance Activities. If the high reading was the result of other causes initiate corrective action as determined by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. C. Effect on Contract Sum: Complete corrective action work with no change in the Contract Sum if high airborne fiber counts were caused by CONTRACTOR’s activities. D. Fibers Counted: The following procedure will be used to resolve any disputes regarding high fiber counts when a project has been stopped due to excessive airborne fiber counts. 1. Large Fibers: “Airborne Fibers” referred to above include all fibers regardless of composition as counted by phase contrast microscopy (PCM), unless additional analysis by transmission or scanning electron microscopy demonstrates to the satisfaction of the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT that non-asbestos fibers are being counted. “Airborne Fibers” counted in samples analyzed by transmission electron microscopy (TEM) shall be asbestos fibers, greater than microns in length and greater than 0.25 microns in diameter. For purposes of stop action levels, subsequent to analysis by electron microscopy, the number of “Airborne Fibers” shall be determined AIR MONITORING – TEST LABORATORY SERVICES 01 41 00 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. by multiplying the number of fibers, regardless of composition, counted by PCM by a number equal to asbestos fibers counted divided by all fibers counted in the electron microscopy analysis. 1.5 ANALYTIC AL METHODS A. The following methods will be used by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT in analyzing filters used to collect air samples. Sampling rates may be varied from printed standards to allow for high volume sampling. 1. Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM) will be performed using NIOSH 7400 Method. This analysis will be conducted off the work site. 2. Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) will be performed using the analysis method set forth in the mandatory section of AHERA regulation 40 CFR Part 763 Appendix A, Subpart E. 1.6 SAMPLE VOLUMES A. The number and volume of air samples taken by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will be in accordance with the following schedule. Sample volumes given may vary depending upon the analytical method used and field operations. 1.7 SCHEDULE OF AIR SAMPLES A. Sample Cassettes: Samples will be collected on 252 mm cassettes as follows: 1. PCM: 0.8 micrometer mixed cellulose ester (MCE) 2. TEM: 0.45 micrometer MCE or 0.40 micrometer polycarbonate, with 5.0 micron MCE backing filter B. Before the Start of Work: 1. The ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will secure the following Air Samples to establish a base line. The base line is an action level expressed in f/cc which is 25% greater than the largest of the following: a. Average of PCM samples collected outside each WORK AREA b. Average of the PCM samples collected outside the building c. 0.01 f/cc Samples collected for TEM analysis will be held without analysis. These samples will be analyzed under the conditions and terms set forth in “Fibers Counted” and “Effect on Contract Sum.” C. Each CONTRACTOR work shift: 1. From start of work of Section 01 52 60 Temporary Enclosures through the work of Section 01 71 10 Project Decontamination, the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT may be taking the following PCM samples every contractor work shift. This schedule will be modified, as required, to meet extant field conditions. 2. Samples will be collected on 25 mm cassettes with the following filter media: a. PCM: 0.8 micrometer MCE Location Sampled Interior of Each WORK AREA Outside Each WORK AREA at Critical Barrier # of Samples Analytical Method Detection Limit (f/cc) Minimum Volume (L) Rate (L/min) 2 PCM 0.01 1,200 1-10 1 PCM 0.01 1,200 1-10 AIR MONITORING – TEST LABORATORY SERVICES 01 41 00 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 Clean Room Equipment Decontamination Outside Building Output Pressure Differential System July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 1 PCM 0.01 1,200 1-10 1 PCM 0.01 1,200 1-10 1 PCM 0.01 1,200 1-10 1 PCM 0.01 1,200 1-10 Additional PCM samples may be taken solely at the discretion of the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. If airborne fiber counts exceed allowed limits, additional samples will be taken as necessary to monitor airborne fiber levels. 1.8 INTERIM OSHA CLEARANCE A. It may be necessary at certain critical points in the Project, to conduct an interim OSHA clearance to allow unprotected personnel to enter completed WORK AREAS prior to the final TEM AHERA Clearance. This would only occur following the requirements of the Visual Inspection component of Section 01 71 10 Project Decontamination. B. This clearance will be performed in the same manner as described above for CONTRACTOR work shift monitoring with the following exceptions: 1. A minimum of five (5) WORK AREA samples will be obtained, subject to field modification in the sole judgment of the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 2. The acceptance criteria will be <0.01 f/cc for all samples. 3. If the acceptance criteria are met, the area will be released for interim access to unprotected workers. 1.9 LABORATORY TESTING A. The services of a current LELAP accredited testing laboratory may be employed by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT to perform laboratory analysis of the air samples. B. A technician will be at the job site, and samples will be sent daily by carrier for next day delivery so that the verbal reports on air samples can be obtained within 24 hours. C. The CONTRACTOR will have access to all air monitoring tests and results. D. A complete record of all air monitoring and results will be furnished to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT and the CONTRACTOR. E. Written Reports of all air monitoring tests will be posted at the job site on a daily basis. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ADDITIONAL TESTING A. The CONTRACTOR may conduct his own air monitoring and laboratory testing. If he elects to do this, the cost of such air monitoring and laboratory testing shall be at no additional cost to the OWNER. B. In the event that the CONTRACTOR conducts his own air monitoring and/or laboratory testing, the CONTRACTOR shall provide all testing results to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 3.2 PERSONAL MONITORING A. OWNER or ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will not be performing air monitoring to meet CONTRACTOR’s OSHA requirements for personnel sampling or any other purpose. END OF SECTION 01 41 00 AIR MONITORING – TEST LABORATORY SERVICES 01 41 00 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, OWNER, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Reimburse OWNER for all sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Reimburse OWNER for water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Service: Reimburse OWNER for electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations through period until Substantial Completion Certificate is executed. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate CONTRACTOR personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program. C. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage. 1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage. 2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work. 3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials. D. Dust-and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust-and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. NOTE: These requirements do not modify in any manner the asbestos decontamination requirements contained in the Project Manual. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. Waste handling procedures. Other dust-control measures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before OWNER's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain-Link Fencing: If required for site security, in addition to existing site features, supply temporary minimum 2-inch , 0.148-inch-thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-OD top rails. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. Projects in excess of $15 Million dollars to provide a separate unit for use of OWNER and ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of OWNER, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 12 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot-square tack and marker boards. 3. Drinking water, disposable cups, ice and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 degrees F. 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless OWNER authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquidpropane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If OWNER authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction. and clean HVAC system as required in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 01 10 00 "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, OWNER, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. Connect to existing water service facilities at street. Coordinate with local authority having jurisdiction for tie in and activation. CONTRACTOR responsible for all fees for activation and use. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to OWNER. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial. All leaks to be repaired within 48 hours of written notice to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water in quantities specified by OSHA standard for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling as required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction to protect site structures from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. 1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connect temporary service to OWNER's existing power source, as directed by OWNER. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions as required by OSHA standards. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Install lighting for Project identification sign. I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install three telephone line(s) for each field office. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office. b. Provide one telephone line(s) for OWNER's use. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Police and fire departments. Ambulance service. CONTRACTOR's home office. CONTRACTOR's emergency after-hours telephone number. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT’s office. Engineers' offices. OWNER's office. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to OWNER. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Minimize extent of use of roads and paved areas. Maintain roads and paved areas during construction operations. 1. Repair any damage caused during construction including removing all debris and construction related materials. 2. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and non-tracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas. 3. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final course. D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. E. F. G. H. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. ‘ Dewatering Waste Disposal Facilities and Drains: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 01 73 00 Execution NOTE: These requirements do not modify in any manner the asbestos decontamination requirements contained in the Project Manual. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. I. Existing Stair Usage: Use of OWNER’s existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to OWNER. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. Do not use monumental stairs for temporary use. J. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. No CONTRACTOR or Sub contractor's signage will be allowed without OWNER prior approval. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required informing public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. b. No other signs are allowed. Remove unauthorized signs immediately. Obtain OWNER approval before placing other signs. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 5 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 1. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for securing the campus at the end of each work day and remains secured until the CONTRACTOR is present again. This will be accomplished by means approved by the OWNER. OWNER will dictate the level of security needed for the campus. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 01 10 00 "Summary." C. Storm water Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from heavy rains. D. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. E. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to OWNER. F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. G. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. H. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by OWNER from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 0.14-mm (6-mil) polyethylene sheet on each 2. Cover floor with two layers of 0.14-mm (6-mil) polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 460 mm (18 inches) up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant-treated plywood. 3. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. NOTE: These requirements do not modify in any manner the asbestos decontamination requirements contained in the Property Manual. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking on the entire campus. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 6 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. K. Site Maintenance: Maintain entire project site during construction, including areas where no work is occurring. 1. Clean site daily of loose debris, trash and other refuse, as indicated in 01 72 00 “Execution”. 2. Do not allow standing water. Remove directly or make provisions to drain away in accordance with local regulations. 3. Cut grass regularly on site and between fence and street to provide vermin control. Grass should be cut at minimum 2 x per month. 4. Fill in holes and ruts from vehicle traffic on site, at vehicle entrances and along public streets. Sweep street at least (1) one time per week. 3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. CONTRACTOR's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Photograph and document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. Any report of mold must be submitted to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT within 48 hours of discovery. B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Protect porous materials from water damage. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. Remove standing water from decks. Keep deck openings covered or dammed. C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 7 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective. b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. c. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. 3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight. D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of CONTRACTOR. OWNER reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 8 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 50 30 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND SERVICES, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section enumerates asbestos decontamination-specific temporary facilities and services in addition to the requirements of Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls. B. This Section includes: 1. CONTRACTOR furnished and required asbestos temporary facilities and services included but are not necessarily limited to: a. Asbestos WORK AREA Containment(s) b. Temporary Partitions C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 10 40 Special Project Procedures, Asbestos Hazard Response 2. Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 3. Section 02 00 83 Asbestos Hazard Response 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Temporary Facilities: Construction, fixtures, fittings, and other built items required to accomplish the WORK but which are not incorporated into the finished WORK. B. Temporary Utilities: A type of temporary facility, primary sources of electrical power, water, natural gas supply etc., obtained from public utilities, other main distribution systems, or temporary sources constructed for the Project, but not including the fixtures and equipment served. C. Temporary Services: Activities required during construction which do not directly accomplish the WORK 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Copies of permits required by public authorities. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of these Technical Specifications, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and the Contract. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Obtain easements where required. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Maintain required facilities until not needed or until shortly before substantial completion. Remove facilities before substantial completion. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND SERVICES, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE 01 50 30 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials which are both suitable for the intended use and durable enough to withstand the use and abuse to be expected during the Project. 2.2 PROTECTIVE CONTAINMENT A. Purpose 1. Protection of fixtures, furnishing, and equipment from potential asbestos fiber contamination, water/humidity damage, and physical damage. B. Requirement 1. The Protective Containment shall be constructed in accordance with the criteria of Section 02 00 83. 2. The Protective Containment interior shall be subjected to Final Clearance Inspection and WORK AREA Clearance in accordance with Section 01 71 40 and Section 02 00 83. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Cooperate with other contractors in the location of temporary facilities, as applicable. 3.2 TERMINATION AND REMOVAL A. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed or when use of appropriate permanent facility is approved but not later than substantial completion. B. Complete permanent work delayed until removal temporary facilities. C. Permanent Facilities used during WORK: Clean and replace parts that are worn in excess of that expected during normal usage. END OF SECTION 01 50 30 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND SERVICES, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE 01 50 30 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 51 10 - TEMPORARY DEHUMIDIFICATION, HEATING, AND COOLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. NOTE: The requirements of this Section do not supersede specific asbestos decontamination requirements contained in other specification sections. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary dehumidification of building interior during construction. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for CONTRACTOR's Moisture Protection, Dust, and HVAC Control Plans. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Interior Temperature Levels: Provide temporary HVAC equipment capable of maintaining temperatures below 80 °F. B. Air Changes: Provide temporary HVAC systems capable of providing a minimum of one complete air change every 120 minutes. C. Air Filtration: Provide temporary HVAC systems capable of providing a minimum of 30 percent filtration for outside air. D. Dehumidification: Provide temporary dehumidification systems as required to reduce and maintain substrate moisture levels and ambient humidity levels within ranges acceptable to manufacturers of interior finish materials per requirements of Division 01 Section "Execution Requirements," requirements of individual specifications sections, and manufacturers' written instructions without delaying approved construction schedule. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for temporary HVAC and dehumidification systems, to include: 1. Climate control equipment. 2. Temperature and humidity controls. 3. Duct, duct accessories, pipe, and piping accessories materials and construction. B. Shop Drawings: Design layouts and descriptive data showing: 1. Equipment layout and duct and/or pipe routing. 2. Staging and sequencing layouts. 3. Enclosure and barricade construction. C. Field Reports: Include reports with Daily Reports summarizing interior temperature and humidity levels from each monitoring location, as well as specific moisture level readings taken as part of requirements of individual specification sections. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Standards: Requirements for temporary facilities are minimum standards. Provide additional facilities as required for proper execution of Work and to meet responsibilities for protection of persons and property. TEMPORARY DEHUMIDIFICATION, HEATING, AND COOLING 01 51 10 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of temporary climate control equipment with finish trades. B. Utility Service Connections 1. Comply with requirements of utility providers and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Arrange with utility service companies for temporary services. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TEMPORARY EQUIPMENT A. Temporary Equipment, General: Provide products for temporary environmental controls using types comparable to those required for permanent construction, except for products that are manufactured specifically for temporary use and approved by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 1. Where products for use in this Section are not specified or detailed, propose products in writing and obtain approval from ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT before commencing work. 2.2 TEMPORARY COOLING UNITS A. Refrigeration System: Fabricated and labeled to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." B. Cooling equipment may be used to control humidity under following conditions: 1. Equipment is capable of maintaining humidity levels meeting Performance Requirements. 2. Reheat coils are utilized to lower relative humidity in air stream. 2.3 TEMPORARY HEATING UNITS A. Heaters: Electric, indirect fired combustion, or steam coil auxiliary heaters. No direct-fired space heaters or propane, salamander type, heaters permitted. B. Heater Controls: Automatically turn heater off if airflow is interrupted or internal temperature of heater exceeds its design temperature or that of supply duct. 2.4 AIR FILTRATION UNITS A. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously. 2.5 TEMPORARY DEHUMIDIFICATION EQUIPMENT A. Use dehumidification equipment to control interior environment 24 hours a day while hygroscopic materials are being stored or installed and until materials in space reach moisture levels recommended by manufacturers. This equipment may also be necessary to maintain specified conditions until building is commissioned. B. Manufacturer: Provide desiccant dehumidifiers by Munters Corp., of solid desiccant design having a single rotary desiccant wheel capable of fully automatic continuous operation, and as follows: TEMPORARY DEHUMIDIFICATION, HEATING, AND COOLING 01 51 10 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 1. Desiccant Wheels: Bacteriostatic and non-toxic. Glass fibers forming support matrix made from uniform continuous strands larger than five microns in diameter which are non-respirable and are not considered a possible health risk by International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC). Wheel flame spread index of 0 and a smoke developed index of 10 per ASTM E 84. 2. Substitutions: Submit for approval by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. C. Do not re-circulate air through dehumidification equipment unless positive pressure is maintained. 2.6 TEMPORARY DUCTWORK AND AIR DISTRIBUTION A. Supply Ductwork: Canvas spiral duct. If supply ductwork is placed outside building, securely attach or anchor to withstand damage from winds. B. Interior Distribution Ductwork: Polyethylene tubing (Layflat) of appropriate diameter to inflate fully without flutter. 1. 2. 3. 4. Distribute conditioned air through 2-3 inch holes cut in Layflat ducting. Distribute air evenly throughout area being served. Suspend temporary system from existing ceiling structure as recommended by system manufacturer. Coordinate with ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT for mounting locations within building. C. HVAC Equipment, General: Provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Permanent HVAC System: Provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction. and clean HVAC system as required in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 01 10 00 "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION AND OPERATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, OWNER, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Size and configure temporary climate control to maintain occupied space temperatures between 40 and 80 degrees F during hours unless conditions that are more stringent are required in other sections. Relative humidity shall be maintained at or below 60% unless conditions that are more stringent are required by other Sections. TEMPORARY DEHUMIDIFICATION, HEATING, AND COOLING 01 51 10 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. C. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. D. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. 1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes. E. Operate temporary HVAC and dehumidification equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. F. Utilize temporary ducting to distribute conditioned air to affected areas of the building. Do not use permanent ductwork to distribute temporary conditioned air. G. Keep doors closed and cover openings to maintain a reasonably airtight envelop around space to minimize infiltration and avoid pockets of high humidity. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Submit test reports and monitoring reports indicating that substrates and ambient humidity are within ranges acceptable to manufacturers of interior finishes at time of delivery of materials to project site and installation. 1. Monitor dry bulb temperature and relative humidity on each floor, using electronic monitoring device (EMD) recording readings at 15 minute intervals, with data downloadable to PC. 2. Use sling psychrometer to measure dry bulb and wet bulb in space on each floor. Take readings at beginning and end of each shift. 3. Provide reports as indicated in Submittals article. 3.4 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain in proper operating condition until use is no longer required or as otherwise approved. 3.5 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY EQUIPMENT A. Maintain temporary climate control equipment in service until Substantial Completion and successful commissioning of permanent HVAC systems. B. Completely remove temporary climate control equipment from site at completion. END OF SECTION 01 51 10 TEMPORARY DEHUMIDIFICATION, HEATING, AND COOLING 01 51 10 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 51 30 - TEMPORARY PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL AND AIR CIRCULATION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 MONITORING A. Continuously monitor and record the pressure differential between the WORK AREA and the environment exterior to the WORK AREA with a recording/data logging device. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Before Start of Work – Submit design of pressure differential system to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT for review. Do not begin WORK until submittal is returned with the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT’S action stamp for indicated that the submittal is returned for unrestricted use. Include in the submittal at a minimum: 1. Number of HEPA filtered fan units required and the calculations necessary to determine the number of machines. 2. Description of projected air flow within WORK AREA(s) and methods required to provide adequate air flow in all portions of the WORK AREA(s). 3. Anticipated pressure differential across WORK AREA enclosures. 4. Description of methods testing for correct air flow and pressure differentials. 5. Manufacturer’s product data on the HEPA filtered fan units to be used. 6. Location of the machine in the WORK AREA(s). 7. Method of supplying adequate power to the machines and designated of building electrical panel(s) which will be supplying the power. 8. Description of work practices to ensure that airborne fibers travel away from workers. 9. Manufacturer’s product data on equipment used to monitor pressure differential between inside and outside of WORK AREA(s). 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Differential monitoring equipment shall be equipped with a warning buzzer which will sound if pressure differential drop below 0.01” of water. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HEPA FILTERED FAN UNITS A. General: Supply the required number of HEPA filtered fan units to the site in accordance with these specifications. Use units that meet the following requirements: 1. Cabinet: Factory-sealed to prevent asbestos-containing dust from being released during use, transport, or maintenance. Arranged to provide access to and replacement of all air filters from intake end. 2. Fans: Rate capacity of fan according to usable air moving capacity under actual operation conditions. TEMPORARY PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL AND AIR CIRCULATION SYSTEM 01 51 30 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 3. HEPA Filters: Provide units whose final filter is the HEPA type with the filter media (folded into closely pleated panels) completely sealed on all edges with a structurally rigid frame. a. Provide units with a continuous rubber gasket located between the filter and the filter housing to form a tight seal. b. Provide HEPA filters that are tested and certified by the manufacturer to have an efficiency of not less than 99.97 percent when challenged with 0.3 um dioctylphthalate (DOP) particles when tested in accordance with Military Standard Number 282 and Army Instruction Manual 136 300 175A. Provide filters that bear a UL586 label to indicate ability to perform under specified conditions. c. Provide filters that are marked with: the name of the manufacturer, serial number, air flow rating, efficiency and resistance, and the direction of test air flow. 4. Pre-filters, which protect the final filter by removing the larger particles, are required in order to prolong the operating life of the HEPA filter. Two stages of pre-filtration are required. Provide units with the following prefilters: a. First stage pre-filter: low efficiency type (e.g. for particles 100 um and larger). b. Second stage (or intermediate) filter: medium efficiency (e.g. effective for particles down to 5 um). c. Provide units with pre-filters and intermediate filters installed either on or in the intake grip of the unit and held in pace with special housing or clamps. 5. Instrumentation: Provide units equipped with: a. Magnehelic gauge or manometer to measure the pressure drop across filters and indicate when filters have become loaded and need to be changed. b. A table indicating the usable air handling capacity for various static pressure readings on the Magnehelic gauge affixed near the gauge for reference, or the Magnehelic reading indicating at what point the filters should be changed, noting Cubic Feet per Minute (CFM) air delivery at that point. c. Elapsed time meter to show the total accumulated hours of operation. 6. Safety and Warning Devices: Provide units with the following safety and warning devices: a. Electrical (or mechanical) lockout to prevent fan from operating without a HEPA filter. b. Automatic shutdown system to stop fan in the event of a rupture in the HEPA filter or blocked air discharge. c. Warning lights to indicate normal operation (green), an impermissibly high pressure drop across the filters (i.e. filter overloading) (yellow), and an impermissibly low pressure drop (i.e. rupture in HEPA filter or obstructed discharge) (red). d. Audible alarm if unit shuts down due to operation of safety systems. 7. Electrical components: Provide units with electrical components approved by the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL). Each unit is to be equipped with overload protection sized for the equipment. The motor, fan, fan housing, and cabinet are to be grounded. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL ISOLATION A. Isolate the WORK AREA from all adjacent areas or building systems with a Pressure Differential that will cause a movement of air from outside to inside at any break in the physical isolation of the WORK AREA. B. Relative Pressure in WORK AREA(s): Continuously maintain the WORK AREA at an air pressure that is lower than that in any surrounding space in the building, or at any location in the immediate proximity outside of the building TEMPORARY PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL AND AIR CIRCULATION SYSTEM 01 51 30 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. envelope. This pressure differential, when measured across any physical or critical barrier, must equal or exceed a status pressure of 0.02 inches of water. 1. Accomplish the pressure differential by exhausting a sufficient number of HEPA filtered fan units from the WORK AREA. 2. Establish required air circulation in the WORK AREA, personnel and equipment decontamination units. 3. Establish isolation by increased pressure in adjacent areas or as part of seals where required. 4. The required number of units is the number determined above plus one additional unit. C. Vent HEPA filtered fan units to outside of building. 1. Mount units exhaust directly or through disposable ductwork. 3.2 AIR CIRCULATION IN THE WORK AREA(s) A. Air Circulation: For purposes of this Section, air circulation refers to either the introduction of outside air to the WORK AREA(s) or the circulation and cleaning of air within the WORK AREA(s). 1. Air circulation in the WORK AREA is a minimum requirement intended to help maintain airborne fiber counts at a level that does not significantly challenge the WORK AREA isolation measures. The CONTRACTOR may also use this air circulation as part of the engineering controls in his worker protection program. B. Determining the Air Circulation Requirements: Provide a fully operational air circulation system supplying a minimum of the following air circulation rate: 4 air changes per hour. 3.3 EXHAUST SYSTEM A. General: Pressure differential isolation and air circulation in the WORK AREA are to be accomplished by an exhaust system as described below: 1. Exhaust all units from the WORK AREA to meet air circulation requirement of this Section. 2. Location of HEPA Filtered Fan Units: Locate fan unit(s) so that makeup air enters WORK AREA primarily though decontamination facilities and traverses WORK AREA as much as possible. This may be accomplished by positioning the HEPA filtered fan unit(s) at a maximum distance from the worker access opening or other makeup air sources. 3. Place End of Unit intake duct or its exhaust duct through an opening in the plastic barrier or wall covering. Seal plastic around the unit or duct with tape. 4. Vent to Outside of Building. 5. Decontamination Units: Arrange WORK AREA and decontamination units so that the majority of makeup air comes through the Decontamination Units. Use only personnel or equipment Decontamination Unit at any time or seal the other so that makeup air passes through the unit in use. 6. Supplemental Makeup Air Inlets: Provide where required for proper air flow through the WORK AREA in location approved by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT by making openings in the plastic sheeting that allow air from outside the building into the WORK AREA. If makeup air is coming from an asbestos-fiber-contaminated source or potentially contaminated, then it should pass through a HEPA filter before entering the WORK AREA. 3.4 AIR CIRCULATION IN DECONTAMINATION UNITS A. Pressure Differential Isolation: Continuously maintain the pressure differential required for the WORK AREA in the: TEMPORARY PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL AND AIR CIRCULATION SYSTEM 01 51 30 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 1. Personnel Decontamination Unit: Across the Shower Room with the Equipment Room at a lower pressure than the Clean Room. 2. Equipment Decontamination Unit: Across the Holding Room with the Wash Room at a lower pressure than the Clean Room. B. Air Circulation: Continuously maintain air circulation in Decontamination Units at the same level as required for the WORK AREA. C. Air Movement: Arrange air circulation through the Personnel Decontamination Unit so that is produces a movement of air from the Clean Room through the Shower Room into the Equipment Room. 3.5 USE OF THE PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL AND AIR CIRCULATION SYSTEM A. General: Each unit shall be serviced by a dedicated minimum 115V 20A circuit with ground fall circuit interrupter (GFCI) supplied from temporary power supply installed under requirements of Section 01 50 30 Temporary Facilities and Services, Asbestos. B. Testing the System: Test pressure differential system before any asbestos-containing material is wetted or removed. Demonstrate operation and testing of pressure differential system to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. C. Demonstrate operation of the pressure differential system to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will include, but not be limited to, the following: use a differential pressure meter or nanometer to demonstrate the required pressure differential at every barrier separating the WORK AREA from the balance of the building, equipment, duct work or outside. D. Use of System During Asbestos Hazard Response Operations: 1. Start fan units before beginning work (before any ACM is disturbed). After asbestos hazard response activities have begun, run units continuously to maintain a constant pressure differential and air circulation until decontamination of WORK AREA is complete. Do not turn off units at the end of the work shift or when asbestos hazard response operations temporarily stop. 2. Do not shut down air pressure differential system during encapsulation procedures, unless authorized by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT in writing. Supply sufficient pre-filters to allow frequent changes. 3. After completing of asbestos hazard reduction activities, allow fan units to run as specified under Section 01 71 10 to remove airborne fibers that may have been generated during asbestos hazard reduction work and cleanup and to purge the WORK AREA with clean makeup air. The units may be required to run for a longer time after decontamination, if dry or only partially wetted asbestos material was encountered during asbestos hazard reduction activities. E. Dismantling the System 1. When a final inspection and the results of final air tests indicate that the area has been decontaminated, fan units may be removed from WORK AREA(s). Before removal from the WORK AREA(s), remove and properly dispose of pre-filter, decontaminate exterior of machine and seal intake to the machine with 6 mil polyethylene to prevent environmental contamination from the filters. END OF SECTION 01 51 30 TEMPORARY PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL AND AIR CIRCULATION SYSTEM 01 51 30 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 52 60 - TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Before Start of Work: submit the following to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT for review. Do not begin WORK until these submittals are returned with the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's action stamp indicating that the submittal is returned for unrestricted use. Include in the submittal at a minimum: B. Spray Cement: Submit the product description including the major components and solvents. C. Sheet Plastic: For fire retardant plastic submit test reports on NFPA 701 test. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET PLASTIC A. Polyethylene Sheet: Provide flame-resistant polyethylene that conforms to requirements set forth by the National Fire Protection Association Standard 701, Small Scale Fire Test for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films. Provide largest size possible to minimize seams, 4.0 or 6.0 mils thick as indicated, frosted or black as indicated. B. Reinforced Polyethylene Sheet: Where plastic sheet constitutes the only barrier between the WORK AREA and the building exterior, provide translucent, nylon reinforced or woven polyethylene, laminated, flame resistant, polyethylene film that conforms to requirements set forth by the National Fire Protection Association Standard 701, Small Scale Fire Test for Flame-resistant Textiles and Films. Provide largest size possible to minimize seams, 4.0 or 6.0 mil thick as indicated, frosted or black as indicated. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Duct Tape: Provide duct tape with adhesive formulated to adhere aggressively to sheet polyethylene. B. Spray Cement: Provide spray adhesive in aerosol cans formulated to adhere aggressively to sheet polyethylene. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SEQUENCE OF WORK A. Carry out work of this Section sequentially. Complete each activity before proceeding to the next. 3.2 GENERAL A. WORK AREA: the location where asbestos hazard response actions occur. It is a variable of the extent of WORK of the Contract. It may be a portion of a room, a single room, or a complex of rooms. A WORK AREA is considered contaminated during the WORK, and must be isolated from the balance of the building, and decontaminated at the completion of the WORK. B. Completely isolate the WORK AREA from other parts of the building so as to prevent asbestos-containing dust or debris from passing beyond the isolated area. Should the area beyond the WORK AREA(s) become contaminated with asbestos-containing dust or debris as a consequence of the WORK, clean those areas in accordance with the TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES 01 52 60 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 C. D. E. F. G. H. I. July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. procedures indicated in Section 01 71 10. Perform all such required cleaning or decontamination at no additional cost to OWNER. Place all tools, scaffolding, staging, etc. necessary for the WORK in the area to be isolated prior to completion of WORK AREA isolation. Remove all moveable furniture and equipment for decontamination from the WORK AREA before commencing WORK. Protect all fixtures and equipment to remain in the WORK AREA. These items will be individually decontaminated and immediately cover with two (2) layers of polyethylene sheeting, at least 6 mil in thickness, and securely taped in place with dust tape before commencing work. Such fixtures and equipment shall be considered outside the WORK AREA unless covering plastic or seal is breached. Disable ventilating systems or any other system bringing air into or out of the WORK AREA. Disable system by disconnecting wires, removing circuit breakers, by lockable switch or other positive means that will prevent accidental premature restarting of equipment. Lockout power to WORK AREA by switching off all breakers serving power or lighting circuits in WORK AREA. Lockout power to circuits running through the WORK AREA wherever possible. Inspection Windows: Install a minimum of two (2) accessible inspection windows providing the maximum practicable viewing field for the WORK AREA in accordance with LAC 33:I11.5151.F.3.c requirements. Each inspection window is to have a 24" X 24" viewing area fabricated from 1/4" acrylic or polycarbonate sheet. Install windows in a manner that provides unobstructed vision from outside to inside of the WORK AREA. Protect window from damage from scratching, dirt or any coatings used during the WORK. A sufficient number of windows are to be installed to provide observation of all portions of the WORK AREA that can be made visible from adjacent areas, to the greatest extent feasible. 3.3 EMERGENCY EXITS: Provide emergency exits and emergency lighting as set forth below: A. At each existing exit door from the WORK AREA provide the following means for emergency exiting: 1. Arrange exit door so that it is secure from outside the WORK AREA but permits exiting from the WORK AREA. 3.4 CONTROL ACCESS: A. Isolate the WORK AREA to prevent entry by unauthorized personnel into WORK AREA or surrounding controlled areas. After receiving written authorization from the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, lock all doors into WORK AREA. Do not obstruct doors required for emergency exits from WORK AREA or from building. B. Locked Access: Arrange WORK AREA so that the only access into WORK AREA is through lockable doors to personnel and equipment decontamination units. C. Visual Barrier: Where the WORK AREA is within view of exterior building areas, provide a visual barrier of opaque 6 mil polyethylene sheeting at least 6 mil in thickness so that the WORK procedures are not visible to the general public. Where this visual barrier would block natural light, substitute frosted plastic. D. Signage: Provide warning signs that conform to OSHA §1926.1101 and LDEQ/USEPA requirements 3.5 ALTERNATIVE METHODS OF ENCLOSURE: A. Alternate methods of containing the WORK AREA may be submitted to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT for approval. Do not proceed with any such method(s) without prior written approval of the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 3.6 RESPIRATORY AND WORKER PROTECTION: TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES 01 52 60 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. Before proceeding beyond this point in providing Temporary Enclosures: A. B. C. Provide Worker Protection per Section 01 56 00. Provide Respiratory Protection per Section 01 56 20. Provide Personnel Decontamination Unit per Section 01 56 30. 3.7 CRITICAL BARRIERS: A. Decontaminate All Surfaces in WORK AREA that will be enclosed by Critical Barriers with a HEPA filtered vacuum or by wet wiping prior to the installation of Critical Barriers. B. Completely Separate the WORK AREA from other portions of the building, and the outside by closing all openings with sheet plastic barriers at least 6mil in thickness. Use existing fire/smoke walls to define individual WORK AREA(s) to the extent practicable. The establishment of a single WORK AREA that extends beyond a single fire/smoke wall boundary is prohibited. Fire/smoke wall locations are depicted on the attached floor plans. C. Individually seal all ventilation openings (supply and exhaust), doorways, windows, convectors and speakers, and other openings into the WORK AREA with duct tape alone or with polyethylene sheeting at least 6 mil in thickness, taped securely in place. Maintain seal until all work including Project Decontamination is completed. D. Provide Sheet Plastic barriers at least 6 mil in thickness as required to seal openings completely from the WORK AREA into adjacent areas. Seal the perimeter of all sheet plastic barriers with duct tape or spray cement. E. Provide Pressure Differential System per Section 01 51 30. F. Clean housings and ducts of all overspray materials prior to erection of any Critical Barrier that will restrict access. 3.8 PREPARE AREA: A. Scaffolding: If fixed scaffolding is to be used to provide access, HEPA vacuum and wet clean area prior to scaffolding installation. B. Remove all electrical and mechanical items, such as lighting fixtures, clocks, diffusers, registers, escutcheon plates, etc. which cover any part of the surface to be worked on with the WORK. C. Clean all contaminated furniture, equipment, and or supplies with a HEPA filtered vacuum cleaner or by wet cleaning, as specified in Section 01 71 20 Cleaning and Decontamination Procedures prior to being moved or covered. All equipment furniture, etc. is to be deemed contaminated unless specifically declared as uncontaminated on the drawings or in writing by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 3.9 PRIMARY BARRIER: A. General: Primary barriers will only be employed for designated equipment and fixtures that will be individually precleaned prior to the commencement of general decontamination work in the Buildings. Examples are trophy and display cases, and computer equipment stacks. B. Sheet Plastic: Protect surfaces with two (2) layers of plastic sheeting. C. Repair of Damaged Polyethylene Sheeting: Remove and replace plastic sheeting which has been damaged by removal operations or where seal has failed allowing water to seep between layers. Remove affected sheeting and wipe down entire area. Install new sheet plastic only when area is completely dry. 3.10 STOP WORK: A. If the Critical barrier falls or is breached in any manner stop WORK immediately. Do not start WORK again until authorized in writing by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 3.11 EXTENSION OF WORK AREA: TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES 01 52 60 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. A. If the Critical Barrier is breached in any manner that could allow the passage of asbestos debris or airborne fibers, then add affected area to the WORK AREA, enclose it as required by this Section of the specification and decontaminate it as described in Section 01 71 10 Project Decontamination. 3.12 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES: A. Construct exterior enclosures as a Critical Barrier as necessary to completely enclose the WORK. Fabricate from reinforced polyethylene sheeting and 2" wood framework. Attach to existing building components or race as necessary for lateral stability. Construct walls to meet all state and local regulations for construction f temporary buildings. Construct to resist a wind of 30 MPH, slope ceiling to permit drainage of rain water. END OF SECTION – 01 52 60 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES 01 52 60 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 56 00 – WORKER PROTECTION, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This Section describes the equipment and procedures required for protecting workers against asbestos contamination and other workplace hazards except for respiratory protection. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Respiratory Protection: is specified in Section 01 56 20. 1.4 WORKER TRAINING: A. Accreditation: All workers are to be accredited Abatement Workers and/or Project Supervisors as applicable and as required by LDEQ LAC 33:111.2799. B. State and Local License Specialty Asbestos Removal and Abatement Louisiana State Licensing Board for Contractors; all workers are to be trained, certified and accredited as required by state or local code or regulation. C. Train, in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101and associated OSHA requirements, all workers in the dangers inherent in handling asbestos and breathing asbestos dust and in proper work procedures and personal and area protective measures. 1.5 MEDICAL EXAMINATIONS A. Medical monitoring must be provided by the CONTRACTOR to any employee or agent that will be working on Site during any phase of the asbestos hazard reduction project or component removal process. At a minimum, medical monitoring must meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1101. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Before Start of WORK: Submit the following to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT for review. Do not start WORK until these submittals are returned with ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT action stamp indicating that the submittal is returned for unrestricted use. B. LDEQ Chapter 27 Accreditation: Submit copies of current LDEQ accreditation certificates for each CONTRACTOR employee or agents, as required by work assignment that will be working on Site during any phase of the asbestos hazard response project. All in accordance with LDEQ LAC 33:111.2739 requirements. C. Certificate Worker Acknowledgement: Submit an original signed copy of the Certificate of Worker's Acknowledgement found at the end of this section, for each worker who is to be at the Site or enter the WORK AREA. D. Medical Examination: Submit a notarized employer statement for each employee and agent involved in on-site asbestos contact activities, indicating employee name and unique alpha-numerical identifier (NOT Social Security Number), stating that the employee's medical record contains a physician's statement that the employee is able to wear and use the type of respiratory protection proposed for the project and work safely in an environment capable of producing heat stress in the employee. All in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101 requirements. WORKER PROTECTION, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE 01 56 00 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. E. Notarized Certifications: Submit certification signed by an officer of the Abatement Contracting firm and notarized that exposure measurements medical surveillance and worker training records are being kept in conformance with 29 CFR 1926. PART 2 - EQUIPMENT 2.1 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING A. Coveralls: Provide disposable full body coveralls and require that they be worn by all workers in the WORK AREA. Provide a sufficient number for all required changes, for all workers in the WORK AREA. B. Boots: Provide work boots with non-skid soles, and where required by OSHA, foot protectives, for all workers. Provide boots at no cost to workers. Paint uppers of all boots red with waterproof enamel. Do not allow boots to be removed from the WORK AREA for any reason, after being contaminated with asbestos-containing material. Dispose of boots as asbestos-contaminated waste at the end of WORK. C. Hard Hats: Provide head protectives (hard hats) as required. Require hats to remain in the WORK AREA throughout the WORK. Thoroughly clean, decontaminate and bag hats before removing them from WORK AREA at the end of the WORK. D. Goggles: Provide eye protectives (goggles) as required. Thoroughly clean, decontaminate and bag goggles before moving them from WORK AREA at the end of the WORK. E. Gloves: Provide work gloves to all workers and require that they be worn at all times in the WORK AREA. Do not remove gloves from WORK AREA. Dispose of gloves as asbestos-contaminated waste at the end of the WORK. 2.2 ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT A. Disposable coveralls, head covers, and footwear covers shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR for the OWNER, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, and/or other authorized representatives who may inspect the job site. Provide (6) complete coveralls and footwear covers per day. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide worker protection as required by the most stringent OSHA standards applicable to the WORK. The following procedures are minimums to be adhered to regardless of fiber count in the WORK AREA. B. Each time the WORK AREA is entered, remove all street clothes in the Changing Room of the Personnel Decontamination Unit and put on new disposable coverall, new head cover, and a clean respirator. Proceed through shower room to equipment room and put on work boots. 3.2 DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES: A. Require all workers to adhere to personal decontamination procedures whenever they leave the WORK AREA. B. Within WORK AREA: Require that workers NOT eat, drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or apply cosmetics in the WORK AREA. To eat, chew, drink or smoke, workers shall follow the procedure described above and then dress in street clothes before exiting the WORK AREA(s) of the building. 3.3 CERTIFICATE OF WORKER'S ACKNOWLEDGEMENT: A. Following this Section is a Certificate of Worker Training. After each worker has been included in the CONTRACTOR's Respiratory Protection Program, completed the training program and medical examination, secure a fully executed copy of this form. WORKER PROTECTION, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE 01 56 00 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 WORKER PROTECTION, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 01 56 00 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. CERTIFICATE OF WORKER'S ACKNOWLEDEGEMENT Project Name: ____________________________________________________________ Date: _______________________ Project Address: __________________________________________________________ Contractor's Name: _______________________________________________________ WORKING WITH ASBESTOS CAN BE DANGEROUS. INHALING ASBESTOS FIBERS HAS BEEN LINKED WITH VARIOUS TYPES OF CANCER. IF YOU SMOKE AND INHALE ASBESTOS FIBERS THE CHANCE THAT YOU WILL DEVELOP LUNG CANCERIS GREATER THAN THAT OF THE NON-SMOKING PUBLIC. Your employer's contract with the OWNER for the above project requires that: You be supplied with the proper respirator and be trained in its use. You be trained in safe work practices and in the use of the equipment found on the job. You receive a medical examination. These things are to have been done at no cost to you. RESPIRATORY PROTECTION: You must have been trained in the proper use of respirators, and informed of the type of respirator to be used on the above referenced project. You must be given a copy of the written respiratory protection manual issued by your employer. You must be equipped at no cost with the respirator to be used on the above project. TRAINING COURSE: You must have been trained in the dangers inherent in handling asbestos and breathing asbestos dust and in proper work procedures and personal and area protective measures. The topics covered in the course must have included the following: Physical characteristics of asbestos Health hazards associated with asbestos Respiratory protection Use of protective equipment Pressure Differential Systems Work practices including hands on or on-job training Personal decontamination procedures Air monitoring, personal and area MEDICAL EXAMINATION: You must have had a medical examination within the past 12 months at no cost to you. This examination must have included: health history, pulmonary function tests and may have included an evaluation of a chest x-ray. By signing this document, you are acknowledging only that the OWNER of the building you are about to work in has advised you of your rights to training and protection relative to your employer, the Contractor. Signature ________________________________________ Employee ID _______________________________________ Printed Name ____________________________________ Witness ___________________________________________ END OF SECTION 01 56 00 WORKER PROTECTION, ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE 01 56 00 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 56 20 – RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Instruct and train each asbestos hazard response worker in correct respiratory use. Require respirator use at all times within active WORK AREA(s) and in all aspects of component cleaning and asbestos waste handling. Use respiratory protection appropriate for the fiber level encountered in the work place or as required for other toxic or oxygen deficient situations encountered. 1.3 STANDARDS A. Except to the extent that more stringent requirements are written directly into the Contract Documents, the following regulations and standards have the same force and effect (and are made a part of the Contract Document by reference) as if copied directly into the Contract Document or as if published copies were bound here with. Where there is a conflict in requirements set forth in these regulations and standards, meet the more stringent requirement. 1. OSHA U.S. Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Safety and Health Standards 29 CFR.134. 29 CFR 1926.1101. 2. ANSI - Practices for Respiratory Protection American National Standard Practices for Respiratory Protection, Z88.2-2015. 3. NIOSH National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. 4. MSHA Mine Safety and Health Administration. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Before Start of Work submit the following to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT for review. Do not begin WORK until these submittals are returned with the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT action stamp indicating that the submittal is returned for unrestricted use. 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product information for each component used, including NIOSH and MSHA Certifications for each component in an assembly and/or for entire assembly. 2. Respiratory Protection Program: The CONTRACTOR shall develop and implement a written Respiratory Protection Program (RPP) that fully complies with the January 8, 1998OSHA requirements found at 29 CFR 1926.1101and 29 CFR1910.Subpart 1;134. All respirators used must be NIOSH approved for asbestos abatement activities. The written RPP shall, at a minimum, contain the basic requirements found at 29 CFR 1910.134 (c) (1) (I-ix) - Respiratory Protection Program. Submit CONTRACTOR's written Respiratory Protection Program manual as required by 29 CFR 1910.134 and 29 CRF 1926.1101. 3. Respiratory Protection Schedule: Submit level of respiratory protection intended for each operation required by the project. The minimum level of respiratory protection used within the WORK AREA is half face air purifying respirators with high efficiency particulate filters. PART 2 - EQUIPMENT 2.1 AIR PURIFYING RESPIRATORS RESPIRATORY PROTECTION 01 56 20 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. A. Respirators: All respirators used must be NIOSH approved for asbestos abatement activities. B. Non-permitted respirators: Do not use single use, disposable or quarter face respirators. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Respiratory Protection Program: Fully comply with the CONTRACTOR's written Respiratory Protection Program (RPP) for the work of the Project and 29 CFR 1926.1101 and 29 CFR 1910.134 requirements. 1. Require that respiratory protection be used at all times that there is any possibility of disturbance of asbestoscontaining materials whether intentional or accidental. 2. Require that a respirator be worn by anyone in a WORK AREA at all times, regardless of activity, during the period that commences with any operation that could cause airborne fibers and continuing until the WORK AREA has been cleared for re-occupancy in accordance with Section 01 71 40. 3. Regardless of Airborne Fiber Levels: Require that the minimum level of respiratory protection used within the WORK AREA is half face air purifying respirators with high efficiency filters. 4. Do not allow the use of single use, disposable, or quarter-face respirators for any purpose. 3.2 TYPE OF RESPIRATORY PROTECTION REQUIRED: A. Provide Respiratory Protection as required by the CONTRACTOR's Respiratory Protection Program (RPP) based on Site and WORK AREA conditions. B. 29 CFR 1926.1101 PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LIMIT (PEL): 8 Hour Time Weighted Average (TWA) of asbestos fibers to which any worker may be exposed shall not exceed 0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter (f/cc). C. 29 CFR 1926.1101 EXCURSION EXPOSURE LIMIT: 30 Minute Average asbestos fibers to which any worker may be exposed shall not exceed the following: 1.0 f/cc. D. Fibers: For purposes of this Section, fibers are defined as all fibers regardless of composition as counted by the NIOSH 7400 procedure. E. Electron Microscopy: If Electron Microscopy is used to determine airborne fiber levels, only asbestos fibers will be enumerated, but fibers of any size detected by the testing of Section 01 71 40 Work Area Clearance Activities will be counted. 3.3 AIR PURIFYING RESPIRATORS A. Negative pressure half or full face mask: Supply a sufficient quantity of respirator filters approved for asbestos, so that workers can change filters during the work day. Require that respirators be wet rinsed, and filters discarded, each time a worker leaves the WORK AREA. Require that new filters be installed each time a worker reenters the WORK AREA. Store respirators and filters at the job site in the changing room and protect totally from exposure to asbestos prior to their use. B. Powered air purifying half or full face mask: Supply a sufficient quantity of high efficiency respirator filters approved for asbestos so that workers can change filters at any time that flow through the face piece decreases to the level at which the manufacturer recommends filter replacement. Require that regardless of flow, filter cartridges be replaced after 40 hours of use. Require that HEPA elements in filter cartridges be protected from wetting during showering. Require entire exterior housing of respirator, including blower unit, filter cartridges, hoses, battery pack, face mask, belt, and cords be washed each time a worker leaves the WORK AREA. Caution should be used to avoid shorting battery pack during washing. END OF SECTION 01 56 20 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION 01 56 20 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 56 30 – DECONTAMINATION UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide separate Personnel and Equipment Decontamination facilities. Require that the Personnel Decontamination Unit be the only means of ingress and egress for the WORK AREA. Require that all materials exit the WORK AREA through the Equipment Decontamination Unit. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Refer to Section 01 50 30 Temporary Facilities and Services, Asbestos Hazard Response for electrical requirements and requirements relative to connection of decontamination facilities to building systems such as water, sewer, and electrical. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Before the Start of Work: Submit the following to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT for review. Do not begin WORK until these submittals are returned with ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT action stamp indicating that the submittal is returned for unrestricted use or final but restricted use. B. Personnel Decontamination Unit: Provide shop drawing showing location and assembly of personnel decontamination units. C. Equipment Decontamination Unit: Provide shop drawing showing location and assembly of equipment decontamination units. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DECONTAMINATION UNIT A. Polyethylene Sheet: Provide flame resistant polyethylene film that conforms to requirements set forth by the National Fire Protection Association Standard 701, Small Scale Fire Test for Flame-resistant Textiles and Films. Provide largest size possible to minimize seams, 4.0 or 6.0 mil thick as indicated, frosted or black as indicated. B. Reinforced Polyethylene Sheet: Where plastic sheet is the only separation between the WORK AREA and building exterior, provide translucent, nylon reinforced, laminated, flame resistant, polyethylene film that conforms to requirements set forth by the National Fire Protection Association Standard 701, Small Scale Fire Test for Flame­ resistant Textiles and Films. Provide largest size possible to minimize seams, 4.0 or 6.0 mil thick as indicated, frosted or black as indicated. C. Duct Tape: Provide duct tape with an adhesive which is formulated to stick aggressively to sheet polyethylene. D. Spray Adhesive: Provide spray adhesive in aerosol cans which is specifically formulated to stick tenaciously to sheet polyethylene. E. Shower Pan: Provide one-piece waterproof shower pan. F. Shower Head and Controls: Provide a factory-made shower head producing a spray of water which can be adjusted for spray size and intensity. Feed shower with water mixed from hot and cold supply lines. Arrange so that control of water temperature, flow rate, and shut off is from inside shower without outside aid. DECONTAMINATION UNITS 01 56 30 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. G. Filters: Provide cascaded filter units on drain lines from showers or any other water source carrying asbestos­ contaminated water from the WORK AREA. Provide units with disposable filter elements as indicated below. Connect so that discharged water passes primary filter and output of primary filter passes through secondary filter. Final discharge must be filtered to limit particles ≤ 2 microns. H. Shower Stall: For Wash-down Station, provide leak tight shower enclosure with integrated drain pan fabricated from durable waterproof material minimum 3' x 3' square with minimum 6' high sides and back. Structurally support as necessary for stability. Connect drain to a reservoir, pump water from reservoir through filters to a drain. I. Sump Pump: Provide totally submersible waterproof sump pump with integral float switch. Provide unit sized to pump 2 times the flow capacity of all showers or hoses supplying water to the sump, through the filters specified herein when they are loaded to the extent that replacement is required. Provide unit capable of pumping debris, sand, plaster or other materials washed off during decontamination procedures without damage to mechanism of pump. Adjust float switch so that a minimum of 3" remains between top of liquid and top of sump pan. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PERSONNEL DECONTAMINATION UNIT A. Provide a Personnel Decontamination Unit consisting of a serial arrangement of connected rooms or spaces, Changing Room, Drying Room, Shower Room, and Equipment Room. Require all persons without exception to pass through this Decontamination Unit for entry into and exiting from the WORK AREA for any purpose. Do not allow parallel routes for entry or exit. Do not remove equipment or materials through Personnel Decontamination Unit. Provide temporary lighting within Decontamination Units as necessary to reach a lighting level of 100 foot candles. 1. Changing Room (clean room): Provide a room that is physically and visually separated from the rest of the building for the purpose of changing into protective clothing. Construct using polyethylene sheeting, at least 6 mil in thickness to provide an airtight seal between the Changing Room and the rest of the building. a. Locate so that access to WORK AREA from Changing Room is through Shower Room. b. Separate Changing Room from the building by a sheet plastic flapped doorway. c. Require workers to remove all street clothes in this room, dress in clean, disposable coveralls, and don respiratory protection equipment. Do not allow asbestos-contaminated items to enter this room. Require Workers to enter this room either from outside the structure dressed in street clothes, or naked from the showers. d. An existing room may be used as the Changing Room if it is suitably located and of a configuration whereby workers may enter the Changing Room directly from the Shower Room. Protect all surfaces of room with sheet plastic as set forth in Section 01 52 60 Temporary Enclosures Authorization for this must be obtained from the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT in writing prior to start of construction. e. Maintain floor of Changing Room dry and clean at all times. Do not allow overflow water from shower to wet floor in Changing Room. f. Damp wipe all surfaces twice after each shift change with a disinfectant solution. g. Provide posted information for all emergency phone numbers and procedures. h. Provide 1 storage locker per employee. 2. Drying Room: Provide a Drying Room as an airlock and a place for workers to dry after showering. a. Construct room by providing a pan continuous with or draining to Shower Room pan. Install a freely draining wooden or non-skid metal floor in pan at elevation of top of pan. b. Separate this room from the rest of the building with airtight walls fabricated of 6 mil polyethylene. c. Separate this room from the Changing Room and Shower Room with airtight walls fabricated of 6 mil polyethylene. d. Separate from Changing Room by a sheet plastic flapped doorway. DECONTAMINATION UNITS 01 56 30 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. e. Provide a continuously adequate supply of disposable bath towels. 3. Shower Room: Provide a completely watertight operational shower to be used for transit by cleanly dressed workers heading for the WORK AREA from the Changing Room, or for showering by workers moving out of the WORK AREA after undressing in the Equipment Room. a. Construct room by providing a shower pan and 2 shower walls in a configuration that will cause water running down walls to drip into pan. Install a freely draining wooden floor in shower pan at elevation of top of pan. b. Separate this room from the rest of the building with airtight walls fabricated of 6 mil polyethylene. c. Separate this room from the Drying Room by a sheet plastic flapped doorway. d. Provide splash proof entrances to Drying Room. e. At each entrance to the Shower Room construct a door frame. Attach to this door frame two overlapping flaps of elastomeric membrane material. Overlap the flaps a minimum of 6" in a direction that presents a shingle like configuration to the water stream from the shower. Overlap sill (bottom) by 2" minimum. Arrange so that any air movement out of the WORK AREA will cause the flaps to seal against the door frame. f. Provide shower head and controls. g. Provide temporary extensions of existing hot and cold water and drainage, as necessary for a complete and operable shower. h. Provide a soap dish and a continuously adequate supply of soap and maintain in sanitary condition. i. Arrange so that water from showering does not splash into the Changing or Equipment Rooms. j. Arrange water shut off and drain pump operation controls so that a single individual can shower without assistance from either inside or outside of the WORK AREA. k. Provide flexible hose shower head. l. Pump waste water to drain or to storage for use in amended water. If pumped to drain, provide final filtration to ≤ 2 micron in line to drain or waste water storage. Change filters daily or more often if necessary. Locate filters inside shower unit so that water lost during filter changes is caught by shower pan. Provide hose bib. 4. Equipment Room (contaminated area): Require work equipment, footwear and additional contaminated work clothing to be left here. This is a change and transit area for workers. a. Separate this room from the WORK AREA by a 6 mil polyethylene flapped doorway. b. Separate this room from the rest of the building with airtight walls fabricated of 6 mil polyethylene. c. Separate this room from the Shower Room and WORK AREA with airtight walls fabricated of 6 mil polyethylene. d. Provide a drop cloth layer of sheet plastic on floor in the Equipment Room for every shift change expected. Roll drop cloth layer of plastic from Equipment Room into WORK AREA after each shift change. Replace before next shift change. Provide a minimum of two (2) layers of plastic at all times. Use only clear plastic to cover floors. 5. WORK AREA: Separate WORK AREA from the Equipment Room by polyethylene barriers. If the airborne asbestos fiber level in the WORK AREA is expected to be high, as in dry removal, add an intermediate cleaning space between the Equipment Room and the WORK AREA. Damp wipe to clean all surfaces after each shift change. Provide one additional floor layer of 6 mil polyethylene per shift change and remove contaminated layer after each shift. 6. Decontamination Sequence: Require that all workers adhere to the following sequence when entering or leaving the WORK AREA: 7. Entering WORK AREA: Worker enters Changing Room and removes street clothing, puts on clean disposable overalls and respirator, and passes through the Shower Room into the Equipment Room. DECONTAMINATION UNITS 01 56 30 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. a. Any additional clothing and equipment left in Equipment Room needed by the worker are put on in the Equipment Room. b. Worker proceeds to WORK AREA. 8. Exiting WORK AREA: a. Before leaving the WORK AREA, require the worker to remove all gross contamination and debris from overalls and feet. b. The worker then proceeds to the Equipment Room and removes all clothing except respiratory protection equipment. c. Extra work clothing such as boots, hard hats, goggles, and gloves are to be stored in contaminated end of the Equipment Room. d. Disposable coveralls are placed in a bag for disposal with other contaminated material. e. Require that Decontamination procedures found in Section 01 56 00 be followed by all individuals leaving the WORK AREA. f. After showering, the worker moves to the Changing Room and dresses in either new coveralls for another entry or street clothes if leaving 3.2 EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION UNIT: A. Provide an Equipment Decontamination Unit consisting of a serial arrangement of rooms, Clean Room, Holding Room, and Wash Room for removal of equipment and material from WORK AREA. Do not allow personnel to enter or exit WORK AREA through Equipment Decontamination Unit. 1. Arrange with airlocks between rooms as required below. B. Wash Down Station: Provide an enclosed Shower Unit located in WORK AREA just outside Wash Room as an equipment, bag, and container cleaning station. 1. Fabricate waterproof floor extending 6' - 0" beyond Wash Down station in all directions. Install seamless waterproof membrane over area and extend over curbs on all four sides. Form curbs from 2" x 4" lumber laid on the flat. 2. Waterproof membrane is to be fabricated from minimum 6 mil polyethylene. 3. Do not allow water to collect on waterproof membrane. Remove continuously with a wet vacuum or mops. C. Wash Room: provide Wash Room for cleaning of bagged or containerized asbestos-containing waste materials passed from the WORK AREA. 1. Construct Wash Room using of nominal 2" x wood framing and polyethylene sheeting, at least 6 mil in thickness and located so that packaged materials, after being wiped clean, can be passed to the Holding Room. 2. Separate this room from the WORK AREA by a single flapped door of 6 mil polyethylene sheeting. 3. Provide a drop cloth layer of plastic on floor in the Wash Room for every load-out operation. Roll this drop cloth layer of plastic from Wash Room into WORK AREA after each load-out. Provide a minimum of two (2) layers of plastic at all times. Use only clear plastic to cover floors 4. Separate this room from adjacent spaces by a sheet plastic flapped doorway. 5. Separate this room from the rest of the building and adjacent spaces with airtight walls fabricated of 6 mil polyethylene. D. Holding Room: Provide Holding Room as a drop location for bagged asbestos-containing materials passed from the Wash Room. Construct Holding Room of at least 6 mil in thickness and located so that bagged materials cannot be passed from the Wash Room through the Holding Room to the Clean Room. DECONTAMINATION UNITS 01 56 30 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 1. Separate this room from the adjacent rooms by flap doors fabricated from 6 mil sheet plastic. E. Clean Room: provide Clean Room to isolate the Holding Room from the building exterior. If possible, locate to provide direct access to the Holding Room from the building exterior. 1. Erect Critical and Primary Barriers as described in Section 01 52 60 Temporary Enclosures in an existing space. If no space exists, construct Clean Room of durable framing and polyethylene sheeting, minimum 6 mil thickness. 2. Separate this room from the exterior by a single flap door of 6 mil polyethylene sheeting. F. Load-out Area: The load-out area is the transfer area from the building to a truck or dumpster. It may be the Clean Room of the Equipment Decontamination Unit or a separate room or loading dock area. Erect Critical and Primary barriers as described in Section 01 52 60 Temporary Enclosures in load-out area. G. Decontamination Sequence: Take all equipment or material from the WORK AREA through the Equipment Decontamination Unit according to the following procedure: 1. At Wash-down Station, thoroughly wet clean contaminated equipment or sealed polyethylene bags and pass into Wash Room. 2. When passing equipment or containers into the Wash Room, close all doorways of the Equipment Decontamination Unit, other than the doorway between the Wash-down Station and the Wash Room. Keep all outside personnel clear of the Equipment Decontamination Unit. 3. Once inside the Washroom, wet clean the bags and/or equipment. 4. When cleaning is complete pass items into Holding Room. Close all doorways except the doorway between the Holding room and the Clean Room. 5. Workers from the building exterior enter Holding Area and remove decontaminated equipment and/or containers for disposal. 6. Require these workers to wear full protective clothing and appropriate respiratory protection. 7. At no time is a worker from an uncontaminated area to enter the enclosure when a removal worker is inside. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION OF THE DECONTAMINATION UNITS A. Walls and Ceiling: Construct airtight walls and ceiling using polyethylene sheeting, at least 6 mil in thickness. Attach to existing building components or a temporary framework. B. Floors: Use 2 layers (minimum) of 6 mil polyethylene sheeting to cover floors in all areas of the Decontamination Units. Use only clear plastic to cover floors. C. Flap Doors: Fabricated from three (3) overlapping sheets with openings a minimum of three feet (3') wide. Configure so that sheeting overlaps adjacent surfaces. Weigh sheets at bottoms as required so that they quickly close after being released. Put arrows on sheets to indicate direction of overlap and/or travel. Provide a minimum of six feet (6') between entrance and exit of any room. Provide a minimum of three feet (3') between doors to airlocks. 1. Visual Barrier: Where the Decontamination Area is immediately adjacent to and within view of occupied areas provides a visual barrier of opaque polyethylene sheeting at least 6 mil in thickness for worker privacy. 2. Alternate methods of providing Decontamination facilities may be submitted to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT for approval. Do not proceed with any such method(s) without written authorization of the OWNER. D. Electrical: Provide subpanel at Changing Room to accommodate all removal equipment Power subpanel directly from a building electrical panel. Connect all electrical branch circuits in Decontamination Unit and particularly any pumps in Shower Room to a ground fault circuit protection device. DECONTAMINATION UNITS 01 56 30 - 5 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 3.4 CLEANING OF DECONTAMINATION UNITS A. Clean debris and residue from inside of Decontamination Units on a daily basis or as otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. Damp wipe or hose down all surfaces after each shift change. Clean debris from shower pans on a daily basis. B. If the Changing Room of the Personnel Decontamination Unit becomes contaminated with asbestos containing debris, abandon the entire Decontamination Unit and erect a new Decontamination Unit. Use the former Changing Room as an inner section of the new Equipment Room. 3.5 SIGNAGE A. Post signage as required by 29 CFR 1926 and 29 CFR 1926.1101. END OF SECTION 01 56 30 DECONTAMINATION UNITS 01 56 30 - 6 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product of listed manufacturer that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's Action: If necessary, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will notify CONTRACTOR of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If CONTRACTOR is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. B. Asbestos-Free Products: Comply with OWNER's separately-published asbestos-free product selection and CONTRACTOR certification requirements. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure or landscaping. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weatherprotection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by OWNER's construction forces. Coordinate location with OWNER. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve CONTRACTOR of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to OWNER. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for OWNER. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. OWNER reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for CONTRACTOR's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for CONTRACTOR's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for CONTRACTOR's convenience will not be considered. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for CONTRACTOR's convenience will not be considered. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's sample. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase; select a product that complies with requirements. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will consider CONTRACTOR's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANTs and OWNERs, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. 6. Requests for substitutions for convenience submitted after award of contract will not be considered. B. Refer to Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for procedures for submitting product substitution requests. Substitutions for convenience are not allowed. PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 71 10 – PROJECT DECONTAMINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. General: Decontamination of the WORK AREA following asbestos hazard response work. 1. If the asbestos hazard response work is on damaged or friable materials, that work is a four-step procedure with two cleanings of the Primary Barrier plastic prior to its removal and two cleanings of the room surfaces to remove any new or existing contamination. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, all materials are considered damaged or friable for the purpose of this Section. 2. If the asbestos hazard response work is on undamaged and non-friable materials, the decontamination procedure is a two-step procedure with two cleanings of the Primary Barrier plastic to remove contamination, thus preventing contamination of the building when the WORK AREA isolation barriers are removed. 3. In both cases operations of the pressure differential system is used to remove airborne fibers generated by the asbestos hazard response work. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Removal of Gross Debris is integral with the performance of asbestos hazard response work and as such is specified in the appropriate work sections(s) of these specifications: 1. Section 02 00 81 Removal of Asbestos Containing Materials 2. Section 09 08 05 Encapsulation of Residual ACM Contamination B. WORK AREA Clearance: Air testing and other requirements which must be met before release of CONTRACTOR and re-occupancy of the WORK AREA are specified in Section 01 71 40 Work Area Clearance Activities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Work of this Section includes the cleaning and decontamination of all surfaces (ceilings, walls, floors) of the WORK AREA and all furniture or equipment in the WORK AREA. 3.2 START OF WORK A. Previous Work: During completion of the asbestos decontamination work specified in other Sections, the asbestos containing/contaminated materials will have been removed and disposed of along with any Gross Debris generated by the asbestos decontamination work. PROJECT DECONTAMINATION 01 71 10 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. B. Start of Work: Work of this Section begins with the cleaning of the Critical Barrier. At start of WORK, the following will be in place: 1. 2. 3. 4. Critical Barrier: An airtight barrier between the WORK AREA and other portions of the building or the outside. Critical Barrier Sheeting: Over protected fixtures and equipment. Decontamination Units: For personnel and equipment in operating condition. Pressure Differential System: In operation. 3.3 CLEANING: A. Cleaning: Carry out a first cleaning of all surfaces of the WORK AREA including items of remaining sheeting, tools, scaffolding and/or staging by use of damp cleaning and mopping, and/or a High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filtered vacuum. Do not perform dry dusting or dry sweeping. Use each surface of a cleaning cloth one time only and then dispose of as contaminated waste. Continue this cleaning until there is no visible debris from removed materials or residue on plastic sheeting or other surfaces. B. Wait ninety-six (96) Air Changes to allow HEPA filtered fan units to clean air of airborne asbestos fibers. Use oscillating fans as necessary to assure circulation of air in all parts of WORK AREAS during this period. Maintain Pressure Differential System in operation for the entire 96 air change period. 3.4 INTERIM OSHA AIR SAMPLING A. Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM): After the WORK AREA passes visual clearance, air samples will be taken and analyzed in accordance with the procedures for PCM set forth in Section 01 71 40 Work Area Clearance Activities. Release criteria are at or below 0.01f/cc, an order of magnitude below the 29 CFR 1926.1101 asbestos air quality Action Level criteria. B. If Release Criteria are not met, repeat Final Cleaning and continue decontamination procedure from that point. C. If Release Criteria are met, proceed with encapsulation of substrate or painting of architectural finishes, as applicable, in accordance with Section 09 08 05. D. Encapsulation/Coating of substrate: Perform encapsulation of substrate or installation of coating systems at this time. The WORK AREA is cleared to 29 CFR 1926.1101 criteria for unprotected worker access. Maintain Pressure Differential System in operation during all asbestos hazard response work. Perform work only after meeting the following requirements: 1. Surfaces to be covered have met the requirements for a visual inspection in this Section. 3.5 FINAL CLEANING A. Final Cleaning: Carry out a final cleaning of all surfaces in the WORK AREA in the same manner as the previous cleaning. B. Cleaning: Carry out a final cleaning of all surfaces of the WORK AREA including items of remaining sheeting, tools, scaffolding, and/or staging by use of damp cleaning and mopping, and/or a High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filtered vacuum. Do not perform dry dusting or dry sweeping. Use each surface of a cleaning cloth one time only and then dispose of as contaminated waste. Continue this cleaning until there is no visible debris from removed materials or residue on plastic sheeting or other surfaces. C. Wait 96 Air Changes to allow HEPA filtered fan units to clean air of airborne asbestos fibers. Use oscillating fans as necessary to assure circulation of air in all parts of WORK AREAS during this period. Maintain Pressure Differential System in operation for the entire 96 Air Changes period. 3.6 VISUAL INSPECTION PROJECT DECONTAMINATION 01 71 10 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. A. Ninety-six (96) Air Changes After Final Cleaning Perform a Complete Visual Inspection of the entire WORK AREA including: all surfaces, ceilings, walls, floors, decontamination unit, all plastic sheeting, seals over ventilation openings, doorways, windows, and other openings; look for debris from any sources, residue on surfaces, dust, or other matter. During visual inspection sweep entire WORK AREA including walls, ceilings, ledges, floors, and other surfaces in the room with exhaust from forced air equipment (leaf blower with approximately 1 HP electric motor or equivalent). If any debris, residue, dust or other matter is found repeat final cleaning and continue decontamination procedure from that point. When the area is visually clean, and if after sweeping of all surfaces with leaf blower, no debris, residue, dust or other materials is found, complete the certification at the end of this Section. Visual inspection is not complete until confirmed in writing, on the certification, by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. B. Temporary lighting: Provide a minimum of 100 foot candles of lighting on all surfaces in the area to be subjected to visual inspection. Provide hand held lights providing 150 foot candles at 4 feet capable of reaching all locations in WORK AREA. C. Lifts: Provide ladders, scaffolding, and lifts as required to provide access to all surfaces in the area to be subjected to visual inspection. Access is defined as sufficient stable platform to allow the inspector to touch all surfaces. 3.7 FINAL AIR SAMPLING TEM A. Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM): After the WORK AREA is found to be visually clean and PCM air sampling completed, TEM air samples will be collected by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT and analyzed in accordance with the procedure for TEM set forth in Section 01 71 40 Work Area Clearance Activities: 1. If Release Criteria are not met, repeat Final Cleaning and continue Decontamination procedure from that point. 2. If Release Criteria are met, proceed to work of Section on removal of WORK AREA isolation. 3.8 REMOVAL OF WORK AREA ISOLATION A. After all requirements of this Section and Section 01 71 40 Work Area Clearance Activities have been met: 1. Shut down and remove the Pressure Differential System. Seal HEPA filtered fan units, HEPA vacuums and similar equipment with 6 mil polyethylene sheet and duct tape to form a tight seal at intake end before being moved from WORK AREA. 2. Remove Personnel Decontamination Unit. 3. Remove the Critical Barriers separating the WORK AREA from the rest of the building. Remove any small quantities of residual material found upon removal of the plastic sheeting with wet wiping, HEPA filter vacuum cleaners and local area protection. If significant quantities, as determined by the ARCHTECT, are found then the entire area affected shall be decontaminated as specified in Section 01 71 20 Cleaning and Decontamination Procedures. 4. Removal all equipment, materials, debris from the work site. 5. Dispose of all asbestos-containing waste material as specified in Section 02 00 84 Disposal of AsbestosContaining Waste Material. 3.9 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE WORK A. Asbestos Hazard Response Work is Substantially Complete upon meeting the requirements of this Section and Section 01 71 40 Work Area Clearance Activities, including submission of: 1. Certification of Visual Inspection. 2. Receipts documenting proper disposal as required by Section 02 00 84 Disposal of Asbestos-Containing Waste Material. 3. Punch list detailing repairs to be made and incomplete terms. PROJECT DECONTAMINATION 01 71 10 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 3.10 CERTIFICATE OF VISUAL INSPECTION A. Following this Section is a “Certificate of Visual Inspection.” This certification is to be completed by the CONTRACTOR and certified by the Project Administrator. Submit completed Certificate with Application for Final Payment. Final payment will not be made until this Certification is executed. PROJECT DECONTAMINATION 01 71 10 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. CERTIFICATION OF VISUAL INSPECTION In accordance with Section 01 71 10 Project Decontamination, the CONTRACTOR herby certifies that he/she has visually inspected the WORK AREA (all surfaces including pipes, beams, ledges, walls, ceilings and floor, Decontamination Unit, sheet plastic, etc.) and has found no dust, debris, or residue. Signature: _____________________________________________________________________ Date: ______________________________________________________________________ Print Name: ______________________________________________________________________ Print Title: ______________________________________________________________________ PROJECT ADMINISTRATOR CERTIFICATION The Project Administrator hereby certifies that he/she has accompanied the CONTRACTOR on his/her visual inspection and verifies that this inspection has been thorough and to the best of his/her knowledge and belief, the CONTRACTOR’s Certification above is a true and honest one. Signature: _____________________________________________________________________ Date: ______________________________________________________________________ Print Name: ______________________________________________________________________ Print Title: ______________________________________________________________________ END OF SECTION 01 71 10 PROJECT DECONTAMINATION 01 71 10 - 5 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 71 20 – CLEANING AND DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK A. The extent of asbestos hazard response, cleaning, and decontamination WORK is shown on the drawings. B. The WORK includes decontamination of areas where asbestos hazard response work is performed. C. All WORK shall be conducted by an LDEQ-Accredited Asbestos Abatement Contractor (CONTRACTOR) as dictated by the applicable rules and regulations contained in LAC 33.III.Chapter 27, LAC 33.III.Chapter 51, and 40 CFR 763 Subpart E. The CONTRACTOR shall be determined by OWNER prior to the start of the WORK and pending the review of all relevant accreditations and certifications by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. D. The WORK described is intended to address all “functional spaces” (FS) inside the SCHOOL which have been potentially contaminated with asbestos fibers. E. The WORK schedule shall be determined by the OWNER with appropriate input from the CONTRACTOR and the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT in order to complete the WORK in a timely fashion and in compliance with the rules and regulations contained in LAC 33.III.Chapter 27, LAC 33.III.Chapter 51, and 40 CFR 763 Subpart E 1.3 IDENTIFICATOIN OF CONTINGUOUS UNITS A. Prior to the commencement of the WORK described in this specification, the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will identify contiguous units (CU) within the SCHOOL that may be effectively isolated using standard critical barriers and containment structures. CUs may be composed of some combination of rooms, hallways, and other associated spaces which may be effectively isolated using critical barriers as determined by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT with appropriate input from the CONTRACTOR. B. Upon the completion of all INITIAL ACTIVITIES and HAZARAD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES by the CONTRACTOR within a given CU, that CU shall be considered a FS which can be subjected to CLEARANCE ACTIVITIES performed by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 1.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES A. CU’s within the SCHOOL will be identified by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT with appropriate input from the CONTRACTOR. The ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT was provided with a map of the SCHOOL by the OWNER; CU’s proposed by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will take into account relevant structural features inside the SCHOOL include permanent walls, temporary room dividers, and fire walls. B. Proposed CUs inside the WORK area are composed of rooms, hallways, closets, and other areas which the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT determined could be effectively isolated using critical barriers and other standard containment structures. C. After the completion of all INITIAL ACTIVITIES and HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES conducted by the CONTRACTOR, the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will conduct a visual inspection of a given CU. Once the CU has passed visual inspection by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, it will be considered an FS for the purpose of conducting all CLEARANCE ACTIVITIES. 1. LAC 33.III.27 defines a “functional space (FS)” as “A room, group of rooms, or homogeneous area (including crawl spaces or the space between a dropped ceiling and the floor or roof deck above), such as classroom(s), a cafeteria, gymnasium, or hallway(s), designated by a person accredited to prepare management plans, design abatement project, or conduct response actions.” CLEANING AND DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES 01 71 20 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. D. The ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT has created maps of proposed CUs throughout the SCHOOL; the CONTRACTOR will use those maps to conduct the WORK. Amendment of asbestos hazard response actions areas and proposed CU designations may be approved by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT on a case-by-case basis based on unforeseen circumstances encountered during WORK. E. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for creating an inventory of all contents that are cleaned and left for the OWNER’s use or considered asbestos-contaminated waste material, taken off site, and disposed of. 1.5 REMOVAL OF DROP CEILING TILES A. Preparation: 1. Ceiling tile (CT) removal will take place as part of the INITIAL ACTIVITIES associated with the WORK performed in each proposed CU. The CONTRACTOR must coordinate the sequence of WORK with the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT in order to properly segregate WORK areas from areas that must remain fully or partially occupied or operational, or in which other special considerations are required, as applicable. B. Procedures: 1. Spray large areas of ceiling tiles thoroughly with amended water using spray equipment recommended by surfactant manufacturer capable of providing a "mist" application to reduce the release of fibers. Spray the asbestos material repeatedly during the ceiling tile removal process to maintain wet conditions, but do not use excessive amounts of water that result in ponding or pooling inside the building. 2. Remove the ceiling in small sections. Do not allow material to dry out. As it is removed, place the material in sealable plastic bags of 0.15 mm minimum thickness. Place sealed debris in second 0.15 mm plastic bag, appropriately labeled, and remove from WORK area. 3. Carefully lower removed and bagged material to the ground without dropping or throwing, or transport to the ground via dust-tight chutes or containers, in accordance with the procedures set forth in EPA 40 CFR 61.147 Code of Federal Regulations. 4. Clean area of all debris and notify the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT for visual inspection. 1.6 ASBESTOS-CONTAINING THERMAL SYSTEMS INSULATION (TSI) REPAIR A. Summary: 1. 2. After the removal of all ceiling tiles in a given CU, but before specialized asbestos hazard response cleaning procedures, commence, it will be the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to repair any damaged, friable, or non-friable, known or suspected ACM TSI located above the drop ceiling grid. Replacement of TSI using the Schedule of Unit Pricing contained in Section 01 22 00 is the preferred method of addressing deteriorated friable or non-friable, known or suspected ACM TSI identified during the course of the work. 1.7 FLOOR TILE & MASTIC REMOVAL A. Summary: 1. After the removal of all ceiling tiles in a given CU but before specialized asbestos hazard response cleaning procedures commence, it will be the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to abate existing VCT tiles and asbestoscontaining adhesive mastic throughout the SCHOOL building. ACM VCT tile is located sporadically throughout the SCHOOL; all adhesive mastic underlying existing VCT throughout the School building is assumed to be asbestos-containing (ACM) and must be handled accordingly. 2. See also Section 09 65 19 regarding VCT tile replacement post asbestos hazard response action CLEANING AND DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES 01 71 20 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. B. Procedures 1. ACM VCT tiles, ACM adhesive mastic, and asbestos-contaminated non-ACM VCT tiles should be removed substantially intact whenever possible and in ways which prevent non-friable ACM from becoming friable. 2. High speed grinding, cutting, sawing, buffing, or any other VCT tile and/or adhesive mastic removal methods which might generate significant quantities of asbestos fibers and/or asbestos-contaminated dust are prohibited. 3. All ACM removal/abatement work must be performed under adequately wet conditions by appropriately accredited Asbestos professionals. 4. All ACM, RACM, ACD, and/or ACWM must be disposed of according to the relevant portions of LAC 33.III Chapter 27 and Chapter 51. 5. See also Specification Sections 01 10 40; 01 50 00; 01 50 30; 01 51 30; 01 52 60; 01 56 00; 01 56 20; and 01 56 30 1.8 TREATMENT OF MOVEABLE ITEMS INSIDE EACH CU A. Summary: 1. The following section of the specification is intended to address the retrieval, aggregation, decontamination, and/or disposal of select moveable items (MIs) within each CU. Retrieval, aggregation, decontamination and/or disposal of MIs can be considered part of the INITIAL ACTIVITES or HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES depending on the nature of a given MI. INITIAL ACTIVITIES and HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES are the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. Retrieval and decontamination of movable items will be informed by the Special O&M Cleaning Practices of USEPA Asbestos Safe Work Practices (http://www.epa.gov/asbestos/safe-work-practices) 2. MIs considered eligible for retrieval, decontamination, and potential reuse include only those MIs deemed by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT to have rigid, non-porous surfaces that can be HEPA-vacuumed and/or wetwiped effectively or rigid, textured, semi-permeable surfaces that can be HEPA-vacuumed effectively. These may include, but may not be limited to, desks, un-upholstered chairs, bookshelves, acoustical tile in good condition which is still firmly affixed to the underlying substrate, file cabinets, and chalk or dry-erase boards. 3. MIs deemed to have soft, porous, or fibrous surfaces which cannot be HEPA-vacuumed and wet-wiped effectively should be disposed of as asbestos-containing waste material (ACWM). These may include, but may not be limited to, books, upholstered chairs and couches, paper display or bulletin board covers, loose paper reams, notebooks, and soft toys or teaching aids. B. Procedures 1. The CONTRACTOR will prepare the A/D area prior to beginning the aggregation and decontamination of MIs. MIs which cannot be effectively decontaminated will be disposed of as part of the INITIAL ACTIVITIES. a. Preparation of the A/D area may include but is not necessarily limited to, HEPA vacuuming of all horizontal and vertical surfaces inside the area, wet cleaning of all horizontal and vertical surfaces inside the area, and/or agitation of all horizontal and vertical surfaces inside the area using a 1 HP leaf blower followed by 2448 of air scrubbing using negative air units equipped with HEPA filters. b. The type of preparation required in a given A/D may be informed by the size of the A/D area, the nature of walls, floor, and/or ceilings in the area, nearby architectural elements (windows, built-in shelves, etc.) and/or the number of items in a given CU which require decontamination. 2. After preparation of the A/D area is complete, the CONTRACTOR will secure clean sheets of 6-mil poly to the floor of the A/D area with adhesive tape. A negative air machine will be installed adjacent to the A/D area. 3. MIs deemed eligible for retrieval and decontamination will be placed in the center of the A/D area on the poly sheeting. The CONTRACTOR will conduct a two-stage decontamination process which will include HEPA vacuuming and wet wiping each eligible MI. CLEANING AND DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES 01 71 20 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 4. After A/D of eligible MIs is complete, the CONTRACTOR will wrap MIs in clean poly sheeting and secure them inside the A/D area. 5. Once all INITIAL ACTIVITIES, HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES, and CLEARANCE ACTIVITIES inside the CU have been completed, MIs inside a given A/D area will be unwrapped and considered eligible for reuse or disposal as non-ACWM at the discretion of the OWNER. 1.9 ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES PER CU A. Preparation 1. The CONTRACTOR will conduct all INITIAL ACTIVITIES and HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES prior to all CLEARANCE ACTIVITIES conducted by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 2. The CONTRACTOR will remove and replace any damaged TSI associated with a CU as part of its INITIAL ACTIVITIES. 3. In those CU where carpet exists, carpet will be removed by the CONTRACTOR as part of the CONTRACTOR’s INITIAL ACTIVITIES. Carpet which has been removed from any CU will be disposed of as ACWM by the CONTRACTOR. CTs will also be removed from each CU by the CONTRACTOR as part of the INITIAL ACTIVITIES. 4. The CONTRACTOR will also remove all existing VCT tile and adhesive mastic as part of the asbestos hazard response work. B. General Procedures 1. Once the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANTS have identified a CU, the CONTRACTOR will isolate the CU using the standard containment structures and critical barriers described in 29 CRF 1926.1101. a. Critical barriers, including standard 3-piece poly sheet airlocks, will be placed over each entrance/exit of a designated CU. b. Critical barriers will also be placed in adjacent hallways and in front of primary building exits and entrances in order to limit air flow and maintain negative pressure during CU preparation. 2. The CONTRACTOR will conduct HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES in each CU by: a. HEPA vacuuming of walls, ceilings, floors, light fixtures, acoustical tiles firmly adhered to a structural substrate (walls or ceilings), room partitions, and all other unobstructed horizontal and vertical surfaces both above and below the drop ceiling plane. b. Wet cleaning of walls, ceilings, floors, and all unobstructed, rigid horizontal and vertical surfaces both above and below the drop ceiling plane. c. Electrified components, which may include but may not be limited to, suspended light fixtures, electrical panels, and wall outlets, will NOT be wet cleaned. Cleaning of these components should include HEPA vacuuming of all horizontal and vertical surfaces associated with the component (2 passes) and/or agitation of all horizontal and vertical surfaces associated with the component using a 1 HP leaf blower followed by 24-48 hours of air scrubbing using negative air filtration units equipped with HEPA filters. 3. After a CU has been cleaned by the CONTRACTOR, the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will agitate the air in the CU as described in the mandatory “aggressive air sampling” protocol outlined in 40 CFR 763 Subpart E Appendix A. 4. While the 20-inch fan is running, the CONTRACTOR will introduce and secure a negative air machine into the CU. 5. The negative air machine will be allowed to run under the CONTRACTOR’S supervision for 24-48 hours while air agitation continues. CLEANING AND DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES 01 71 20 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 6. At the conclusion of 24-48 hours of continuous air scrubbing, the negative air machine will be removed from the CU by the CONTRACTOR, the fan will be turned off, and the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will perform a final visual inspection to determine if the CU is ready for CLEARANCE ACTIVITIES 1.10 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Work Area Clearance: Specified in Section 01 71 40 Work Area Clearance Activities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Air Filtration Units 1. Shall be factory-sealed and equipped with HEPA filters (final), pre-filters, instrumentation to monitor pressure differential, and safety and warning devices 2. Provide units with electrical components approved by the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and Underwriter's Laboratories (UL). 3. Access to the units for replacement of all air filters shall be from intake end. Provide units with pre-filters and intermediate filters installed either on or in the intake grid of the unit and held in place with special housings or clamps. The filter media shall be completely sealed on all edges with a structurally rigid frame with a continuous rubber gasket. 4. HEPA Filters: Provide units equipped with HEPA filters. Filters shall be individually tested and certified by the manufacturer. 5. Pre-filters: Provide a two-stage pre-filtration to extend the life of the primary HEPA filter. The first-stage pre-filter is a low-efficiency type effective for particles 100 micrometers and larger. The second-stage (or intermediate) filter has a medium efficiency effective for particles down to 5 micrometers. 6. Instrumentation: Provide units equipped with a magnehelic gauge or manometer to measure the pressure drop across filters and to indicate when filters have become loaded and need to be changed. A table indicating the usable air-handling capacity for various static pressure readings on the magnehelic gauge affixed near the gauge for reference, or the magnehelic reading indicating at what point the filters should be changed, noting cubic feet per minute (CFM) air delivery at that point. Provide an elapsed time meter to show the total accumulated hours of operation. 7. Safety and Warning Devices: Provide units with the following safety and warning devices: a. Warning lights to indicate normal operation, too high a pressure drop across the filters (i.e., filter overloading), and too low of a pressure drop (i.e., rupture in HEPA filter or obstructed discharge). b. GFCIs – Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters. c. Audible alarm if unit shuts down due to operation of safety systems. d. Electrical overload protection sized for the equipment. The motor, fan, fan housing, and cabinet are to be grounded. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Complete the following before start of WORK of this Section: 1. 01 52 60 Temporary Enclosures 2. 01 56 20 Respiratory Protection 3. 01 56 00 Worker Protection, Asbestos Hazard Response Actions CLEANING AND DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES 01 71 20 - 5 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 3.2 HEPA VACUUMING A. The CONTRACTOR shall use only HEPA filtered vacuum equipment for all portion of the WORK which require vacuuming. B. HEPA Filters: A High Efficiency Particulate Air filter capable of trapping and retaining 99.97% of asbestos fibers greater than 0.3 micron in diameter. C. HEPA vacuuming shall be performed on all horizontal and vertical surfaces inside a given CU. This shall include, but should not necessarily be limited to, walls, floors, suspended ceiling grids, rigid ducts and other structures located above the suspended ceiling grid, light fixtures located below the suspended ceiling grid, windows, countertops, and built-in book shelves. D. MIs eligible for decontamination shall also be HEPA vacuumed before being wet-cleaned and considered eligible for reuse or disposal at the discretion of the OWNER. 3.3 WET CLEANING A. B. C. D. E. Accomplish wet cleaning during decontamination with paper towels or disposable rags. Immerse paper towel or rag in container of water with surfactant, or diluted removal encapsulant. Wring out. Fold into quarters. Wipe surface once and refold to a fresh face of cloth. Proceed in this manner until all available faces of paper towel or rag have been used. F. Dispose of paper towel or rag. G. Do not place rag back in container to rinse out or for any other purpose. If a used towel or rag comes in contact with water, empty container and refill. H. Material adhered to a surface with removal encapsulant may require the application of additional removal encapsulant to facilitate cleaning. 3.4 REMOVAL OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING DEBRIS A. Work of this Section is limited to the cleanup of a small quantity of amassed debris (if applicable) that has fallen from an architectural finish, fire-proofing, or thermal insulation on pipes, boilers, and other thermal equipment. B. Remove asbestos-containing debris and decontaminate the area involved using the following sequence: 1. Shut down all ventilation into room. 2. Seal entry to WORK AREA with 6 mil polyethylene for entry. Slit polyethylene for entry. Install a flap to cover the slit automatically; tape slit closed after entry. 3. Start HEPA vacuum before entering the area. 4. Remove all small debris with the HEPA vacuum. 5. HEPA vacuum surfaces of all pieces too large to be removed by the suction of the HEPA vacuum. 6. Pick up such pieces and place in the bottom of a 6 mil polyethylene disposal bag conforming to the requirements of Section 02 00 84 Disposal of Asbestos-Containing Waste Material. Place pieces in the bag without dropping and avoiding unnecessary disturbance and release of material. 7. Remove all remaining visible debris with HEPA vacuum. 8. Secure area from occupancy until air monitoring results collected per Section 01 71 40 Project Decontamination indicate that areas is safe for re-occupancy. 3.5 CLEANING AND DECONTAMINATING MIs A. Perform all work of decontaminating MIs in the A/D area as described above. B. HEPA vacuum all surfaces of MI before moving the object to the A/D area. C. Pick up object, if possible, and HEPA vacuum all surfaces. CLEANING AND DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES 01 71 20 - 6 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. D. Wet clean the MI and place in storage location. E. Decontaminate area where object was located by HEPA vacuuming twice, in two perpendicular directions. Wet clean if necessary to remove any debris. END OF SECTION 01 71 20 CLEANING AND DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES 01 71 20 - 7 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 71 40 – WORK AREA CLEARANCE ACTIVITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1. Visual Inspection: required as a prerequisite of air testing, is set forth in Section 01 71 10 Project Decontamination 2. Air Monitoring: performed by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT during asbestos hazard response work, is described in Section 01 41 00 Air Monitoring Test Laboratory Services 1.2 SUMMARY A. NOT in Contract Sum: This Section describes work being performed by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. This work is NOT in the contract sum. B. This Section sets forth required post asbestos hazard response work airborne asbestos fiber concentrations in the WORK AREA(s) and describes testing procedures that the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will use to measure these levels. 1.3 CONTRACTOR RELEASE CRITERIA A. The asbestos hazard response WORK AREA will be considered cleared with the WORK AREA is visually clean and airborne asbestos structure concentrations have been reduced to the level specified below. 1.4 VISUAL INSPECTION A. Work of this Section will not begin until the visual inspection described in Section 01 71 10 Project Decontamination is complete and has been certified by the Project Administrator. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. To determine if the airborne asbestos structure concentration encountered after the completion of asbestos hazard response activities has been reduced to the specified level, the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will secure samples and analyze them according to the following procedures. 1. Aggressive sampling procedures as described below will be followed. 2. TEM samples will be secured and analyzed as indicated below. 3. Work Area Clearance: upon meeting the TEM Clearance requirements, the work of Section 01 71 10 Project Decontamination can continue. 4. The ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will use the mandatory protocols and procedure specified in EPA regulations 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart E, Appendix A. 1.6 AGGRESSIVE SAMPLING A. All Final Clearance Air Samples will be taken using aggressive sampling techniques as follows 1. Before sampling pumps are started, the exhaust from forced-air equipment (leaf blower with an approximately 1 HP electric motor) will be swept against all walls, ceilings, floors, ledges, and other surfaces in the WORK AREA. WORK AREA CLEARANCE ACTIVITIES 01 71 40 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 2. One 20-inch diameter fan per ~10,000 cubic feet of room volume will be mounted in a central location at approximately 1 meter above floor, directed toward ceiling and operated at low speed for the entire period of sample collection. 3. Air samples will be collected in areas subject to normal air circulation away from room corners, obstructed locations, and sites near windows, doors of vents. 4. After air sampling pumps have been secured (turned off) all fans will be secured. 1.7 SCHEDULE OF AIR SAMPLES A. General: The number and volume of air samples taken and analytical methods used by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will be in accordance with the following schedule. Sample volumes given may vary depending upon the analytical instruments used. 1.8 TRANSMISSION ELECTRON MICROSCOPY (TEM) A. Inside each FS, after completion of all cleaning and asbestos hazard response action work, a minimum of seven (7) screening samples will be obtained and analyzed as follows: 1. NOTE: The sample volume stated below is not the lowest required by AHERA/Chapter 27 regulations. It is the minimum sample volume allowed for 10 grip openings to give an analytical sensitivity of 0.005 structures/cc. 10 grip openings are the number generally preferred by laboratories performed TEM analysis based on data quality considerations. Adherence to this volume provides greater reproducibility of results. The minimum volume necessary to avoid the necessity of interior-to-outside comparison samples is 1,199 liters. The ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will use the protocols and procedure specified in EPA regulations 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart E, Appendix A Location Sampled Each Work Area Work Area Blank Laboratory Blank # of Samples 5 1 1 Analysis Method TEM TEM TEM Analytical Sensitivity (f/cc) 0.005 0.005 0.005 Required Volume (L) 1,200 – 1,800 0 0 Sampling Rate (L/min) 1-10 Open for 30 Seconds Do Not Open *Note: Depending on the specific WORK AREA configuration, greater than the stated quantity of samples may be required to conform to the AHERA/Chapter 27 base requirements. This will be determined in the field by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT and in the sole judgment of the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. B. Analysis will be performed using the analytical method set forth in the AHERA Regulation 40 CRF Part 763, Subpart E, Section IV, Mandatory Interpretation of TEM Results to Determine Completion of Response Action C. Asbestos Structures referred to in this Section includes asbestos fibers, bundles, clusters or matrices, as defined by method of analysis. D. Release Criteria: Decontamination of the work site is complete if one of the two following conditions are met: 1. The average concentration of asbestos of five (5) air samples collected within the affected FS and analyzed by the TEM methods contained in 40 CFR part 763 Subpart E, Appendix A is not statistically significantly different, as determined by the Z-test calculation found in 40 CFR part 763, Subpart E, Appendix A from the average asbestos concentration of five (5) air samples collected at the same time outside the affected functional space and analyzed in the same manner, and the average asbestos concentration of the three (3) field blanks described in 40 CFR part 763 Subpart E, Appendix A is below the filter background level of 70 structures per square millimeter (70 s/mm2). 2. The volume of air drawn for each of the five (5) samples collected within the affected FS is equal to or greater than 1,199 L of air for a 25-mm filter or equal to or greater than 2,799 L of air for a 37-mm filter, and the average WORK AREA CLEARANCE ACTIVITIES 01 71 40 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. concentration of asbestos as analyzed by the TEM methods in 40 CFR part 763, Subpart E, Appendix A for the five (5) air samples does not exceed the filter background level of 70 structures per square millimeter (70 s/mm2). 3. If at least one of these conditions is not met, then the decontamination is incomplete and the cleaning procedures of Section 01 71 20 shall be repeated. 1.9 LABORATORY QUALIFICATIONS A. All laboratory analysis will be performed by laboratories that are current and satisfactory Louisiana Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program (LELAP) participants. 1.10 LABORATORY TESTING A. Samples will be sent by overnight courier for analysis by TEM. Samples will not be carried on weekend, so that samples shipped on Friday will arrive on the following Monday. Verbal results will normally be available during the 2nd working day after receipt of samples by the laboratory. All TEM results will be available to the CONTRACTOR. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) END OF SECTION 01 71 40 WORK AREA CLEARANCE ACTIVITIES 01 71 40 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 73 00 -EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. NOTE: The requirements of this Section do not supersede specific asbestos decontamination requirements contained in other specification sections. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the WORK including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Construction layout. Field engineering and surveying. Installation of the WORK. Cutting and patching. Starting and adjusting. Protection of installed construction. Correction of the WORK. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor. B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted. a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems. D. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. E. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor. F. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data. EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. G. Certificates: Submit FEMA Flood Elevation Certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation for improvements comply with regulations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT of locations and details of cutting and await directions from ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. Primary operational systems and equipment. Fire separation assemblies. Air or smoke barriers. Fire-suppression systems. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. Control systems. Communication systems. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. Conveying systems. Electrical wiring systems. Operating systems of special construction. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. Membranes and flashings. Exterior curtain-wall construction. Sprayed fire-resistive material. Equipment supports. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. Noise-and vibration-control elements and systems. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. C. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. 1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with requirements in Sustainable Design Requirements -LEED for Schools. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning site work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the WORK. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the WORK, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the WORK is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Description of the Work. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. Recommended corrections. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the WORK indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the WORK properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the WORK are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the WORK. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of CONTRACTOR, submit a request for information to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT according to requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." E. Surface and Substrate Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for preparation of substrates to receive subsequent work. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the WORK, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Identification: ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT’s survey shall be used to identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the WORK. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the WORK. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring fieldengineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work. E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the WORK and components of the WORK accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the WORK is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the WORK. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 5 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. a. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. E. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. F. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 6 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in Section 01 91 13 "General Commissioning Requirements." B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements." 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed WORK is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION 01 73 00 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 7 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 –GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Substantial Completion procedures. Final completion procedures. Warranties. Repair of the Work. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. CONTRACTOR's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. B. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. C. Product Data for cleaning agents. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. C. Field Report: For pest control inspection. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. CONTRACTOR's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (CONTRACTOR's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the WORK is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting OWNER unrestricted use of the WORK and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, As-built drawings, training on equipment, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's signature for receipt of submittals. 1. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 2. Submit sustainable design submittals required in Sustainable Design Requirements -LEED for Schools 3. Submit changeover information related to OWNER's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise OWNER of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to OWNER. Advise OWNER's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct OWNER's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 6. Advise OWNER of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with OWNER in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. 11. Removal of all site debris. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will either proceed with inspection or notify CONTRACTOR of unfulfilled requirements. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify CONTRACTOR of items, either on CONTRACTOR's list or additional items identified by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the WORK identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will either proceed with inspection or notify CONTRACTOR of unfulfilled requirements. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify CONTRACTOR of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the WORK identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by CONTRACTOR that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. b. c. d. e. Project name. Date. Name of ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. Name of CONTRACTOR. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel electronic file. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will return annotated file. b. PDF electronic file. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will return annotated file. c. Three paper copies. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will return one copy. 1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT for designated portions of the WORK where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit OWNER's rights under warranty. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the WORK that are completed and occupied or used by OWNER during construction period by separate agreement with CONTRACTOR. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of CONTRACTOR. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. 3 hard copies and 1 disc containing PDF file are required to fulfill submittal requirements. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1. Coordinate preparation of warranty documentation with requirements in Section 17823 "Operation and Maintenance Manuals." Provide same count of hard copy and electronic copy materials as specified. Provide the following: a. Letter listing starting date, duration, expiration date, and warranty provider contact information for all warranty items. b. Name and contact information of CONTRACTOR's point of contact for warranty repairs. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ a professional cleaning company for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. l. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. m. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. n. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. 1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report on completion of cleaning. o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 1) Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 2) Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 5 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 78 30 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance data. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. B. C. D. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. Cx: Commissioning CxP: Commissioning Provider (third party hired independently by the OWNER) 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Initial Submittal: Submit to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT three (3) electronic copies of each manual in final form no later than 60 days prior to commencement of the OWNER’s training. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. 1. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will forward one (1) electronic copy of the manuals received to the CxP for review and comment. The CxP shall receive the final form of the Operation and Maintenance manuals 45 days prior to the commencement of OWNER training to have adequate time for review and comments. 2. CONTRACTOR will make any corrections required and resubmit all copies until ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT and CxP find them acceptable. B. Final Submittal: Submit three (3) paper copies of each manual and one (1) electronic copy of each manual in final form evidencing acceptance by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT and CxP. The Operation and Maintenance manuals must be delivered to the OWNER (end user) a minimum of 7 days prior to the commencement of any OWNER’s training on all systems or equipment. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factoryauthorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. List of documents. List of systems. List of equipment. Table of contents. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 30 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with the same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: For paper copies of manuals enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve, electronic copies shall have title page as first page of file for manual. Include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Subject matter included in manual. Name and address of Project. Name and address of the OWNER. Date of submittal. Name, address, and telephone number of CONTRACTOR. Name and address of ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include a comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each binder of the set. D. Paper Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 30 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 1) Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 2) Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 3) Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch, 20-lb/sq. ft. white bond paper. 4) Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a) If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b) If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents and drawing locations. E. Electronic Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size to ensure files for manual are contained within a single compact disc. Arrange contents alphabetically by file name or bookmarking, for organization to coincide with system, subsystem and equipment. Ensure instructions for subsystems, equipment and components of one system into a single compact disc. 1. Compact Discs: All files shall be burned on to compact discs and provided in plastic cases. Discs shall be clearly labeled with the same information as required for the manual title page. If more than one manual is present on the disc a listing of the manual contained shall be provided on the label. a. If two or more discs are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each disc into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other discs by bookmarking or annotations in the electronic files contained on the disc if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Discs shall be clearly labeled with the same information as required for the manual title page. If more than one manual is present on the disc a listing of the manual contained shall be provided on the label. 1) Bookmarking: The O&M manuals shall be fully integrated and navigable. “Fully integrated and navigable”, is defined in this context as the ability for users to review and locate information utilizing bookmarks or other file organization methods. Use of folder structures for this purpose will be permitted provided file nomenclature utilized clearly indicates the type of document the file contains and all information pertinent to a given system, sub-system and/or unit is contained within a single folder. 2) Searching: All files shall be fully searchable using standard text search functions. If scanned copies of documents are provided, these files shall be converted into OCR recognized text format with original image overlay. 3) Acceptable Electronic Formats: Acceptable electronic formats for files provided for manuals shall be as listed below. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to provide free viewers for all formats not listed below for any files provided in their submission. a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Word 2002 or newer Excel 2002 or newer Adobe Acrobat 8.0 or newer WAV WMV DWF HTML OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 30 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 2.3 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Product name and model number. Manufacturer's name. Color, pattern and texture. Material and chemical composition. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Inspection procedures. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by the Board's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by the Board's operating personnel. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 30 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 in Section 01 78 39 Project Record Documents. END OF SECTION 01 78 30 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 30 - 5 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Record Drawings. Record Specifications. Record Product Data. Miscellaneous record submittals. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints for incorporation in Record Documents by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy in format specified in Section 01 30 10 Submittals of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate markedup Product Data as a component of manual. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. E. Reports: Submit written report weekly indicating items incorporated into project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 b. c. d. e. July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. Dimensional changes to Drawings. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. Depths of foundations below first floor. Locations and depths of underground utilities. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. Revisions to electrical circuitry. Actual equipment locations. Duct size and routing. Locations of concealed internal utilities. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. Changes made following ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT's written orders. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 1) Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 2) Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 3) Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 4) Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Format: Format specified in Section 01 30 10 Submittals. 3. Identification: As follows: a. b. c. d. e. Project name. Date. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." Name of ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. Name of CONTRACTOR. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications in format specified in Section 01 30 10 Submittals. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Product Data in format specified in Section 01 30 10 Submittals. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals in format specified in Section 01 30 10 "Submittals". 1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition. END OF SECTION 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 02 00 81 – REMOVAL OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Installation of Critical Barriers, and WORK AREA Isolation Procedures are set forth in Section 01 52 60 Temporary Enclosures B. Project Decontamination procedures are specified in Section 01 71 10 Project Decontamination C. Disposal of asbestos containing waste is specified in Section 02 00 84 Disposal of Asbestos-Containing Waste Material 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Before Start of Work: 1. Submit the documents as listed in Section 01 30 10 to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT for review 2. Do not start WORK until these submittals are returned indicating that the submittal is approved for unrestricted use. B. Surfactant 1. Submit product data, use instructions, and recommendations from manufacturer of surfactant intended for use. 2. Include data substantiating that material complies with requirements. C. NESHAP Certification 1. Submit certification from manufacturer of surfactant or removal encapsulant that, to the extent required by this specification, the material, if used in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, will wet Asbestos-Containing Materials to which it is applied as required by the National Emission Standard for Hazardous Pollutants (NESHAP) Asbestos Regulations (40 CFR 61, Subpart M). D. Safety Data Sheet: Submit the Safety Data Sheet, or equivalent, in accordance with the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200) for each surfactant, encapsulating material and solvent proposed for use on the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WETTING MATERIALS A. Wetting Materials: For wetting prior to disturbance of Asbestos Containing Materials or Asbestos Contaminated Materials use either amended water or a removal encapsulant. 2.2 AMENDED WATER A. Amended Water: Provide water to which a surfactant has been added. Use a mixture of surfactant and water that results in wetting of the Asbestos-Containing Material and retardation of fiber release during disturbance of the material equal to or greater than that provided by the use of one ounce of a surfactant consisting of 50% polyoxyethylene ester and 50% polyoxyethylene ether mixed with five gallons of water. REMOVAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS 02 00 81 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 2.3 POLYETHYLENE SHEET A. Polyethylene Sheet: Provide flame resistant polyethylene film that conforms to requirements set forth by the National Fire Protection Association Standard 701, Small Scale Fire Test for Flame-resistant Textiles, and Films. Provide the largest size possible to minimize seams, 4.0 or 6.0 mil thick as indicated, frosted, or black as indicated. 2.4 DUCT TAPE A. Duct Tape: Provide duct tape with adhesive formulated to adhere aggressively to sheet polyethylene. 2.5 DISPOSAL BAGS AND CONTAINERS A. Disposal Bags and Containers: Provide bags and containers labeled as required by Section 02 00 84 Disposal of Asbestos-Containing Waste Material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTIVE BARRIER A. Protective Barrier: Over floors/decks underlying asbestos hazard response WORK AREA, install drop cloth with a clear, 6 mil sheet plastic in all areas where asbestos hazard response work is to be carried out in accordance with Section 01 52 60. Completely cover floor with sheet plastic. B. Install Protective Barrier at the beginning of each work shift. Install only sufficient plastic for work that shift. C. Remove Protective Barrier at end of each work shift or as WORK in an area is completed. Fold plastic toward center of sheet and pack in disposal containers. Keep material on sheet continuously wet until containerized. D. Install walkways of durable, non-skid, impermeable material between active removal areas and decontamination units to protect non-asbestos hazard response work areas from tracked ACM. Install walkways at the beginning of, and remove at the end of, work shift. 3.2 WORKER PROTECTION A. Before beginning work with any material for which a Safety Data Sheet has been submitted, provide workers with the required protective equipment. Require that appropriate protective equipment be used at all time in accordance with Section 01 56 00. 3.3 WET REMOVAL A. Thoroughly wet Asbestos-Containing Materials to be removed prior to removal/handling. Maintain Asbestos-Containing Materials in a continuously wetted condition until containerized for disposal. B. Mist WORK AREA continuously with amended water whenever necessary to suppress/minimize airborne fiber levels. C. Remove saturated Asbestos Containing Materials in small sections. Do not allow material to dry. As it is removed, simultaneously pack material while still wet into disposal containers. Clean container exterior, move to Wash Down Station adjacent to Material Decontamination Unit. END OF SECTION 02 00 81 REMOVAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS 02 00 81 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 02 00 83 - ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work Area preparation and general working conditions which must be established prior to the aggregation and decontamination of moveable items present in the SCHOOL Building; 2. Work Area preparation and general working conditions which must be established prior to the repair, removal, and/or encapsulation of ACM/ACBM inside the SCHOOL Building, as applicable; 3. Work area preparation and general working conditions which must be established prior to the decontamination of interior surfaces of the SCHOOL Building. 4. Containerization of Asbestos-Containing or Asbestos-Contaminated Waste for transportation. 5. Transportation of Asbestos-Containing or Asbestos-Contaminated Waste to disposal facility. 6. Disposal of Asbestos-Containing or Asbestos-Contaminated Waste. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. The Submittals required for asbestos hazard response activities are detailed in Division 1 of this Specification. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT will retain and furnish qualified Inspectors, for sampling, analysis, and visual inspection to verify the conformance of the CONTRACTOR to the specified requirements of the WORK of this Section. B. Requirements for Training, entity certification, notifications, etc. for which the CONTRACTOR is responsible, are detailed in Division 1. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Occupancy: 1. The Project Site is not occupied. B. Non-Asbestos Hazard Response Preparation 1. This specification specifically excludes the following, related, Abatement Contractor activities that are necessary to accomplish the WORK. a. Scaffold system erection, management, and removal. b. Rigid duct system support, rigging, and stabilization. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Deliver all materials in the original packages, containers or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand name (where applicable). ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES 02 00 83 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 2. Store all materials subject to damage off the ground, away from wet or damp surfaces and under cover sufficient enough to prevent damage or contamination. Replacement materials shall be stored outside of the WORK AREA until needed. 3. Damaged, deteriorating or previously used materials shall NOT be used and shall be removed from the work site and disposed of properly. 4. Polyethylene sheeting for walls and stationary objects shall be a minimum of 4-mil thickness. For floors and all other uses sheeting of at least 6-mil thickness shall be used in width selected to minimize the frequency of joints. In all uses and applications of polyethylene sheeting, supply flame retardant, ASTM E-84 Class A rated polyethylene sheeting. 5. Methods of attaching polyethylene sheeting shall be agreed upon in advance by the CONTRACTOR and ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT; methods shall be selected to minimize damage to equipment and surfaces. Non-penetrating, adhesive methods of attachment using waterproof tape or liquid adhesives are preferred; penetrating methods of attachment including any combination of furring strips, staples, nails, or screws must be pre-approved by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. Adhesive methods must be capable of sealing adjacent sheets of polyethylene and capable of sealing polyethylene to dissimilar finished or unfinished surfaces under both wet and dry conditions (including the use of amended water). 6. Polyethylene sheeting used for worker decontamination enclosure or visual barriers shall be opaque. 7. Disposal bags shall be of 6-mil polyethylene, transparent, pre-printed with labels as required by OSHA, EPA, LDEQ, and DOT. 8. Warning signs as required by 29 CFR 1926.1101 9. The use of spray glue and spray adhesive is specifically prohibited 10. Removal-surfactant (wetting agent) shall be a 50/50 mixed of polyoxyethylene ether and polyoxyethylene ester, or equivalent, mixed in a proportion of 1 fl ounce to 5 gallons of water or specified by manufacturer. Any substitute surfactant must be approved by ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. General: 1. Full body disposable protective clothing, including head, body, and foot coverings (unless using footwear as described elsewhere in this Section) consisting of material impenetrable by asbestos fibers (Tyvek or equivalent) shall be provided to all asbestos hazard response workers and authorized visitors in sizes adequate to accommodate movement without tearing. 2. Additional safety equipment (e.g. hard hats meeting the requirements of ANSI Standard Z89.1-1981, eye protection meeting the requirements of ANSI Standard Z87.1-1979, safety shoes meeting the requirements of ANSI Standard Z41.1-1967 and disposable PVC gloves), as necessary shall be provided to all workers and authorized visitors. 3. Non-skid footwear shall be provided to all workers working in asbestos hazard response. Disposable clothing shall be adequately sealed to the footwear to prevent body contamination. 4. A sufficient supply of disposable mops, rags, and sponges for WORK AREA decontamination shall be available. B. Removal 1. A sufficient supply of scaffolds, ladders, lifts, and hand tools shall be provided as needed. 2. A sufficient supply of HEPA filtered vacuum systems shall be available during cleanup. 3. The use of “power washers” and similar high pressure water cleaning equipment is specifically prohibited. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. This specification covers the mitigation of potential exposure to asbestos hazards from ACM VCT tile, ACM adhesive mastic, asbestos-contaminated building structures, components, moveable items, and miscellaneous debris by methods listed in Subsection 3.6 of this Section. ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES 02 00 83 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. B. The Project Location is Julius Rosenwald Elementary School, 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131. 3.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The WORK specified herein shall be the removal of asbestos-containing and/contaminated building materials and/or moveable items by competent persons trained, knowledgeable and qualified in the techniques of asbestos hazard response actions as well as the handling of asbestos-containing and/or asbestos-contaminated materials, who comply with all applicable City of New Orleans, State of Louisiana, and Federal regulations and are capable of and willing to perform the WORK of this Contract in accordance with these Specifications. ACM removal and abatement work shall be followed by specialized wet cleaning and sundry site decontamination procedures conducted by appropriately competent and accredited asbestos professionals in order to achieve WORK AREA clearance in accordance with the rules and regulations contained in LAC 33.III Chapter 27 and 40 CFR 763, Subpart A, Appendix E. B. The CONTRACTOR shall supply all labor, materials, services, insurance, permits and equipment necessary to carry out the work in accordance with all City of New Orleans, State of Louisiana, and Federal regulations and these Specifications. C. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for restoring the WORK AREA and auxiliary areas used during the asbestos hazard response action to conditions equal to or better than original. Any damages caused during the performance of asbestos hazard response activities shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR at no additional expense to the OWNER. D. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for handling, including arranging for disposal, of all controlled and/or hazardous waste material generated by CONTRACTOR personnel in accordance with all applicable City of New Orleans, State of Louisiana, and Federal environmental laws and regulations. CONTRACTOR’s responsibility shall apply regardless of whether the original material or product was supplied by the OWNER or by the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall not dispose of any controlled/hazardous waste on the OWNER’s property. E. The CONTRACTOR shall specifically comply with all applicable City of New Orleans, State of Louisiana, and Federal regulations pertaining to asbestos and shall not release or cause to be released visible emissions of asbestos to the outside air. The CONTRACTOR shall also specifically comply with all applicable OSHA standards, including 29 CFR Parts 1910 and 1926. F. The CONTRACTOR will, at a minimum, conduct Safety Meetings for all of his employees engaged in the Project, at least once per week. The content of the Safety Meetings will relate to specific hazards that may be encountered in the active WORK AREA(s), as well as general safety considerations. The OWNER may require specific safety meetings to be held, in addition, when worksite specific changes in conditions arise. G. The CONTRACTOR is to be specifically aware that this Project is physically located in a highly visible and sensitive location. Therefore, it is required of the CONTRACTORs to present and execute the WORK of this Project in the most professional and competent manner possible. H. All contact with the public and media regarding this Project, if any, will be controlled and dictated by the OWNER or the duly designated OWNER REPRESENATIVE(s). The CONTRACTOR and his personnel will conduct themselves accordingly. Direct all individuals making inquiries and questions regarding the Project to the OWNER’s REPRESENTATIVE. 3.3 GENERAL PREPARATION A. Work Areas 1. Post caution signs meeting the specifications of OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 at any location and approaches to a location where airborne concentrations of asbestos fibers may exceed ambient background levels. Signs shall be posted at a distance sufficient from the WORK AREA to permit an employee to read the sign and take the necessary protective measure to avoid exposure. Additional signs may need to be posted following construction of workplace enclosure barriers. 2. Investigate the WORK AREA with ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT and agree on the pre-abatement condition. Conduct a space-by-space inspection with ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT and prepare a written Inventory of all existing damage in those spaces where asbestos hazard response activities will occur. Use still or video photography to supplement the written damage inventory. The Inventory will be signed and certified as accurate by both parties. ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES 02 00 83 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 3. Shut down and lock out electric power and piping system to the Project Area. Coordinate with ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT to shut down and lockout HVAC machinery and equipment as required to accomplish the work of the Project. 4. Insure safe installation (including ground fault circuit interruption protection) of temporary power sources and equipment by compliance with all applicable electrical code requirements and OSHA requirements for temporary electrical systems. 5. Establish positive control of sanitary sewer systems in affected area(s) to insure no discharge of asbestos contaminated wastewater. 6. The CONTRACTOR shall provide sanitary facilities for asbestos hazard response personnel outside the WORK AREA and maintain them in a clean and sanitary condition throughout the Project. 7. The OWNER will provide water for construction purposes. CONTRACTOR shall connect to existing OWNER systems. See Section 01 50 00 of this specification for additional information regarding CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to the OWNER regarding payment for utility usage during the course of the WORK. 8. Install critical barriers at all windows, doorways, corridor entrances, drains, and other openings between the WORK AREA and uncontaminated areas outside the WORK AREA with 4 mil polyethylene sheeting and tape. 9. Protect all architectural surfaces, furniture, fixtures, and equipment from physical, water/moisture, and asbestos contamination damage through the use of protective barrier and local area relocation of moveable items. Floor surfaces shall be protected by physically durable material (e.g. Masonite, plywood, sheet rubber) overlain by sheet polyethylene. B. Worker Decontamination Enclosure (WDE) Systems 1. Due to relatively short duration and nature of the Project, a portable, self-contained WDE shall be provided. The WDE will conform, in all respects, to the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1101 2. Clean Room shall be sized to adequately accommodate the work crew. Benches shall be provided, as well as hooks for hanging up street clothes. Shelves for storing respirators shall also be provided in this area. Clean disposable clothing, replacement filters for respirators, towels, and other necessary items shall be provided in adequate supply at the Clean Room. A location for postings shall also be provided in this area. A locking door shall be used to permit access into the Clean Room from outside the WORK AREA. Lighting, heat, and electricity shall be provided as necessary for comfort. This space shall not be used for storage of tools, equipment or materials (except as specifically designated) or as office space. 3. Shower Room shall contain one or more showers as necessary to adequately accommodate workers. Each shower head shall be supplied with hot and cold or warm water adjustable at the tap. The shower enclosure shall be constructed to ensure against leakage of any kind. An adequate supply of soap, shampoo, and towels shall be supplied by the CONTRACTOR and available at all times. Shower water shall be drained, collected and filtered through a system with at least 1.0 micron particle size collection capability prior to release to the public sanitary and/or storm water system. 4. The Equipment Room shall be used for storage of equipment and tools at the end of a shift after decontamination using a HEPA filtered vacuum and/or wet cleaning techniques as appropriate. Replacement filters (in sealed containers until used) for HEPA vacuum and negative pressure ventilations equipment, extra tools, containers of surfactant and other materials and equipment that may be required during the abatement may also be stored here as needed. A walk-off pan filled with water shall be located in the WORK AREA just outside the equipment room for workers to clean off foot coverings after leaving the WORK AREA to prevent excessive contamination of the worker decontamination enclosure system. A container lined with labeled 6-mil polyethylene bag for collection of disposable clothing shall be located in this room. C. Isolation of the WORK AREA 1. The containment WORK AREA shall be separated from uncontaminated areas by the construction of containment barriers and the advantageous use of existing walls, decks, and floors, as appropriate. 2. The method of development of the containment and protection barriers is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. However, each containment barrier design is subject to the prior approval of the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT as to its durability and utility, based on the CONTRACTOR activity involved. ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES 02 00 83 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. a. At a minimum, floors shall be covered with two (2) layers of 6 mil sheet polyethylene with each layer lapped a minimum of 18” at each joint. Each floor polyethylene will extend a minimum of 18” vertically from the floor elevation at each wall/partition. The vertical floor polyethylene layers will be overlapped by at least 12” by the wall sheet polyethylene. b. At a minimum, walls shall be covered with two (2) layers of 4 mil sheet polyethylene with each layer lapped a minimum of 18” at each joint. Each wall polyethylene layer will extend a minimum of 12” vertically over the floor polyethylene sheet. c. Where polyethylene sheeting is the only barrier between the WORK AREA and non-work areas, such as the ceiling to deck interstice, two (2) independently attached layers of reinforced polyethylene sheeting are required. d. At a minimum, there must be one, clear window looking into each WORK AREA which allows the OWNER, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT, and/or other relevant parties to view the interior of the WORK AREA without being required to enter containment. Each window must be of a sufficient size and in a location which allows for unobstructed viewing of the WORK AREA, to the greatest extent feasible. D. Maintenance of Workplace Barriers and WDE Systems 1. All polyethylene barriers inside the Project Area, in the WDE, and at partitions constructed to isolate the WORK AREA from occupied areas shall be inspected a minimum of twice per work shift. Inspect and correct any discrepancies prior to the commencement of each shift and following the completion of each shift. Document inspections and observations in the daily project log. 2. Damage and defects in the enclosure system are to be repaired immediately upon discovery. 3. Use smoke tubes to test the effectiveness of the barrier system on a daily basis, or as directed by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT. Record results in the daily project log. 4. At any time during the asbestos hazard response activities after barriers have been erected, if visible material is observed outside the WORK AREA or if damage occurs to barriers, WORK shall immediately stop, repairs be made to barriers, and debris/residue cleaned up using appropriate HEPA vacuuming and wet mopping procedures. 5. If air samples collected outside of the WORK AREA during asbestos hazard response activities indicate airborne fiber concentrations greater than 0.01 f/cc or pre-measured background levels (whichever is lower) work shall immediately stop for inspection and repair of barriers. Cleanup of surfaces outside of the work area using HEPA vacuum or wet cleaning techniques may be necessary. E. Once constructed and reinforced as necessary, test enclosure for leakage using smoke tubes. Repair or reconstruct as needed. F. Clearly identify and maintain emergency and fire exits from the WORK AREA. G. Commencement of WORK shall not occur until: 1. Enclosure systems have been constructed and tested. 2. All pre-abatement submissions, notifications, postings, and permits have been provided and are satisfactory to the OWNER. 3. All equipment for asbestos hazard response, clean-up, and disposal are on hand. 4. All worker training (and certification) is completed and documented. 5. All submittal requirements are met. H. Alternative procedure 1. Procedures described in the specification are to be used at all times. 2. If specified procedures cannot be used, a request must be made in writing to the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT providing details of the problem encountered and recommended alternative(s). 3. Alternative procedures shall provide equivalent or greater protection than the procedures replaced. 4. Any alternative procedure must be approved in writing by the ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT prior to implementation. ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES 02 00 83 - 5 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 3.4 WORKPLACE ENTRY AND EXIT PROCEDURES A. Personnel entry and exit 1. All workers and authorized personnel shall enter and exit the WORK AREA through the WDE system. 2. All personnel who enter the WORK AREA must sign the entry log, located in the Clean Room, upon entry and exit. 3. All personnel, before entering the WORK AREA, shall read and be familiar with all posted regulations, personal protection requirements (including workplace entry and exit procedures) and emergency procedures. A sign off sheet shall be used to acknowledge that these have been reviewed and understood by all personnel prior to entry. 4. All personnel shall proceed first to the Clean Room, remove all street clothes and don respirator protection as required and disposable coveralls, head covering, and foot covering. Hard hats, eye protection and gloves shall also be used if required. Clean respirators and protective clothing shall be provided and used by each person for each separate entry into the WORK AREA; therefore, each exit from the containment area requires the worker to shower. 5. Personnel wearing designated personal protective equipment shall proceed from the Clean Room through the Shower Room and Equipment Room to the main WORK AREA. 6. Before leaving the WORK AREA all personnel shall remove gross contamination from the outside of respirators and protective clothing by brushing and/or wet wiping procedures. Each person shall clean bottoms of protective footwear in the walk-off pan just prior to entering the Equipment Room. 7. Personnel shall proceed to Equipment Room where they remove all protective equipment except respirators. Deposit disposable clothing into appropriately labeled containers for disposal. 8. Reusable, contaminated footwear shall be stored in the Equipment Room when not in use in the WORK AREA. Upon completion of asbestos hazard response work it shall be disposed of as asbestos-contaminated waste. Rubber boots may be decontaminated at the completion of the asbestos hazard response work for reuse. 9. Still wearing respirators, personnel shall proceed to the shower area, clean the outside of the respirators and the exposed face area and hair under running water prior to removal of the respirator; shower and shampoo to remove asbestos contamination. Various types of respirators will require slight modification of these procedures. An airline respirator with HEPA filtered disconnect protection may be disconnected in the Equipment Room. A dual cartridge respirator may be worn into the shower. Cartridges must be replaced for each new entry into the WORK AREA. 10. After showering and drying off, proceed to the Clean Room and don clean disposable clothing if there will be later re-entry into the WORK AREA or street clothes, if it is the end of the work shift. 11. These procedures shall be posted in the Clean Room and the Equipment Room. 3.5 PERSONNEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Respiratory Protection 1. All respiratory protection, except for the requirements noted below, shall be provided to workers in accordance with the submitted written respiratory protection program, which includes all items in OSHA 29 CFR 1910.134[b](1-11). This program shall be posted in the Clean Room of the worker decontamination enclosure system. B. Protective Clothing 1. Disposable clothing including head, foot, and fully body protection shall be provided in sufficient quantities and adequate sizes for all workers and authorized visitors. 2. Hard hats, protective eye wear, gloves, rubber boots and/or other footwear shall be provided as required for workers and authorized visitors. Safety shoes will be required. All workers must wear high-visibility vests and all proper OSHA PPE while within the construction area/fence. 3.6 ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES 02 00 83 - 6 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. A. Isolate the Project Area from the adjacent spaces (both vertically and horizontally) and the outdoor environment. Where existing walls, door, windows, and other such closure is missing, securely seal openings with fire-rated polyethylene sheets at least 6 mil in thickness. 1. The establishment of containment, WDE systems, and emergency exits shall be accomplished in accordance with Subsection 3.3. 2. Establish negative ventilation systems to maintain a minimum 0.02” water column negative pressure within the WORK AREA in accordance with this Section. 3. Dampen all rigid, vertical and horizontal, non-electrified surfaces inside the interior of the WORK AREA to reduce fiber dispersal into the air. Accomplish wetting by producing a fine mist of amended water. Saturate dust, debris, and all applicable materials/surfaces to the maximum extent possible without producing gross amounts of run-off. 4. Rigid, porous non-electrified, and/or non-porous electrified shall not be dampened. These surfaces and/or structural components include suspended light fixtures, electrical panels, and 12”x12” acoustical panels adhered to a rigid structural substrate. These surfaces and/or components will be addressed using HEPA vacuuming (2 passes minimum) and/or air agitation/air filtration hazard response methods only. 5. At all times, it is incumbent on the CONTRACTOR to minimize the amount of water used, commensurate with effective fiber release control. Filtered and decanted water may be recycled or disposed of through the storm sewer system. Unfiltered water, slurry, and sludge will be assumed to be asbestos contaminated waste and disposed of in accordance with Section 02 00 84 requirements. 6. Decontaminate each disposal container in accordance with Paragraph 3.7. 7. All respiratory protection, except for the requirements noted below, shall be provided to workers in accordance with the submitted written respiratory protection program, which includes all items in OSHA 29 CFR 1910.134[b](1-11). This program shall be posted in the Clean Room of the worker decontamination enclosure system. 3.7 REMOVAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAMINATED DEBRIS A. Wet all debris within the WORK AREA with amended water. Wetting will be accomplished without the use of strong, direct streams. Initial wetting will be accomplished by means of applying a low velocity, highly atomized mist to the demarcated areas. The misting will continue until all materials and surfaces are saturated. After initial wetting, the maintenance of the affected materials will continue in the same manner. B. Start removal at the point of work farthest from the point of entry of the WORK AREA, and work toward the entrance point. C. While continuously misting the affected area/debris, remove ACM debris. D. Place all debris in small disposal or bulk containers in accordance with this Section. Decontaminate all disposal containers through HEPA vacuuming and wet cleaning prior to removal from the WORK AREA. E. Continue this process until all debris has been removed. NOTE: Any debris remaining in the WORK AREA is assumed to be asbestos-containing or asbestos-contaminated and subject to removal under the requirements of this specification. F. Decontaminate each disposal container in accordance with these requirements. G. The WORK AREA and disposal containers will be visually inspected by the Inspector for any visible remaining debris. Any remaining visible debris will be removed. Continue this process until no visible debris remains in the WORK AREA. ACM contaminated debris that is to be cleaned of ACM prior to disposal as construction debris will be rigorously inspected, during cleaning and load out, for visual signs of ACM contamination. H. If air samples collected adjacent to the WORK AREA during abatement activities indicate airborne fiber concentrations greater than 0.01 f/cc or premeasured background levels (whichever is less), work shall immediately stop for further inspection and remedial action. I. Personal protective equipment shall be used as dictated elsewhere in this Section. 3.8 CLEARANCE INSPECTION PROCEDURES A. Following the completion of asbestos hazard response activities, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the Inspector that WORK AREAs are ready for Clearance Inspection. B. The Inspector will conduct Clearance Inspections to verify completed operations. ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES 02 00 83 - 7 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. C. The Clearance Inspection criteria for all work area Categories is as follows: 1. A visual inspection will be conducted to insure that no visible dust, debris, or residue remain prior to approve for clearance air sampling. 2. Sample collection, media, and procedures shall be in accordance with 40 CFR Part 763 Appendix A, Subpart E 3. Analysis, conducted by TEM in accordance with 40 CFR Part 763 Appendix A, Subpart E, must result in satisfactory concentrations of airborne asbestos in accordance with the aforementioned Method. 4. Air samples shall be analyzed by Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) by a current and satisfactory Louisiana Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program (LELAP) participant laboratory. 5. All samples at all locations shall indicate concentrations of airborne fibers less than the AHERA standard. 6. Areas exceeding this level shall be re-cleaned and retested until satisfactory levels are obtained. 7. NOTE: The cost of retesting, following an initial failure, will be to the CONTRACTOR’s account. 3.9 ASBETSOS DISPOSAL PROCEDURES A. Dispose of asbestos-containing waste material in accordance with Section 02 00 84 requirements. END OF SECTION 02 00 83 ASBESTOS HAZARD RESPONSE ACTIVITIES 02 00 83 - 8 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 02 00 84 – DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING WASTE MATERIAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section describes the disposal of Asbestos-Containing Materials (ACM). The term "disposal" includes the activities of packaging transportation, and disposal of asbestos-containing waste materials. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 01 10 40 Special Project Procedures, Asbestos Hazard Response, describes applicable federal, state and local regulations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DISPOSAL CONTAINERS A. In accordance with LDEQ LAC 33.111. Chapter 51, provide clear, leak-tight polyethylene bags or sheeting in impermeable containers labeled with text as follows: 1. Label in accordance with LDEQ LAC 33.111. Chapter 51 requirements. 2. Label in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1200(0 of OSHA's Hazard Communication standard. 3. Label in accordance with USDOT 49 CFR parts 171 and 172. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION A. Comply with the Worker Protection and Respiratory Protection requirements of Sections 01 56 00 and 01 56 20. B. Comply with the documentation and all other requirements contained in Title 49 of the Code of Federal Regulations (parts 171-180). C. An LDEQ ADVF must be generated for each and every shipment of asbestos-containing waste material. The cost of the ADVF(s) is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility. D. All waste is to be hauled by a waste hauler with all required licenses from all federal, state, and local authorities with jurisdiction. E. Load all asbestos-containing waste material in disposal bags or other packaging compliant with the regulations. F. Protect interior of truck or roll off box with Critical and Primary Barriers. G. Carefully load containerized waste in fully enclosed dumpsters, trucks, or other appropriate vehicles for transport. Exercise care before and during transport to insure that no unauthorized persons have access to the material. H. Do not store containerized materials outside of the WORK AREA. Take containers from the WORK AREA directly to a sealed truck or dumpster. This container will be locked and secure to insure that its contents are not disturbed while tagged at the Project Site I. Do not transport disposal bagged materials on open trucks. J. Disposal Site: Must be permitted by LDEQ for the disposal or Asbestos-Containing Waste Materials and meet all requirements of LDEQ LAC 33.111.Chapter 51 and all other, related. LDEQ disposal site rules/regulations. K. Comply with all LDEQ LAC 33.111.Chapter 51 requirements for ADVF use and distribution. END OF SECTION 02 00 84 DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING WASTE MATERIAL 02 00 84 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 09 08 05 – ENCAPSULATION OF RESIDUAL ACM or ACBM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK The extent of potential ACM encapsulation WORK required is as herein specified. A. Removal and replacement is the preferred method for addressing damaged TSI encountered during the course of the WORK. B. If necessary, the WORK may include encapsulating any known or assumed ACM TSI located above the SCHOOL’s drop ceiling gird which has been subject to repair during the INITIAL ACTIVITIES described in Section 01 10 30 and Section 01 10 40. 1. Repaired or stabilized ACM TSI located above the ceiling grid will be coated with one (1) coat of penetrating encapsulant. 2. Repaired asbestos-insulated and/or containing Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) piping will be coated with two (2) coats of penetrating encapsulant and one (l) coat of bridging encapsulant 3. Repaired asbestos-containing HVAC Ductwork joint tape will be coated with two (2) coats of penetrating encapsulant and one (1) coat of bridging encapsulant C. If WORK must be extended to high topographical relief material surfaces (facebrick, CMU, and acoustic tile) in order to achieve final Clearance of a given WORK AREA, encapsulation will be achieved by coating these surfaces as described in this Section. D. It is the CONTRACTOR's sole responsibility to protect all surfaces (architectural, fixtures, furnishings) below the ceiling elevation from exposure to encapsulant deposition. If encapsulant is applied to these surfaces, remove and restore to original conditions. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including label analysis and application instructions for each material proposed for use. B. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions with specific project requirements noted. C. Performance Warrantee: Submit manufacturer's performance guarantee. D. Certification: Submit written approval of entity installing the encapsulant from encapsulant manufacturer. E. Safety Data Sheet (SOS): Submit the SOS in accordance with the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200) for each surfactant and encapsulating material proposed for use on the work. 1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to the job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. Name of title of material Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture Manufacturer's name Thinning instructions ENCAPSULATION OF RESIDUAL ACM CONTAMINATION 09 08 05 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 5. Application instructions B. Deliver materials together with a copy of the Safety Data Sheet for the material. 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS A. Apply encapsulating materials only when environmental conditions in the WORK AREA are as required by the manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ENCAPSULANTS A. Provide penetrating or bridging type encapsulants specifically designed for application to Asbestos­ Containing Material. B. Fire Safety 1. Use only materials that qualify as ASTM E84 Class A 2.2 PENETRATING ENCAPSULANTS A. Encapsulants rated as ACCEPTABLE by Final Report on Evaluation of Encapsulants for Sprayed-on Asbestos Containing Materials in Buildings; USEPA Government Contract# 68-03-2552-T2005; Battelle Columbus Laboratories; June 9, 1981. 2.3 BRIDGING ENCAPSULANTS A. Encapsulants rated as ACCEPTABLE by Final Report on Evaluation of Encapsulants for Sprayed-on Asbestos Containing Materials in Buildings; USEPA Government Contract # 68-03-2552-T2005; Battelle Columbus Laboratories; June 9, 1981. 2.4 COLORANT A. Encapsulants shall be non-white pigmented and conform to LAC 33.111.5151.F.3.l.ii requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Do Not Commence Application of encapsulating materials until all repair WORK within the WORK AREA has been completed. 3.2 WORKER PROTECTION A. Before beginning work with any material for which a Safety Data Sheet has been submitted provide workers with the required protective equipment. Require that appropriate protective equipment be used at all times. B. In addition to protective breathing equipment required by OSHA requirements or by this specification, use painting pre filters on respirators to protect the dust filters when organic solvent based encapsulants are in use. 3.3 SEALING EXPOSED EDGES ENCAPSULATION OF RESIDUAL ACM CONTAMINATION 09 08 05 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. A. Seal edges of Asbestos-Containing Material exposed up to an inaccessible spot such as a sleeve, wall penetration, etc. with two (2) coats of encapsulant. B. Prior to sealing, permit the exposed edges to dry completely to permit penetration of the sealer. 3.4 ARCHITECTURAL SURFACES (ABOVE CEILING ELEVATION) A. Before start of work on an architectural finish complete the work of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Section 01 56 00 - Worker Protection, Asbestos Hazard Response Section 01 56 20 - Respiratory Protection Section 01 52 60- Temporary Enclosures Section 01 56 30 - Decontamination Units B. Comply with all manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. Consult with manufacturer's technical representative for conditions not covered. C. Encapsulate all surfaces in full compliance with manufacturer's procedures. D. At completion of Encapsulation and before removal of WORK AREA enclosures and Pressure Differential System, decontaminate space in accordance with requirements of Sections 01 71 10 and 01 71 40. END OF SECTION 09 08 05 ENCAPSULATION OF RESIDUAL ACM CONTAMINATION 09 08 05 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 09 51 13 – ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for patching in existing ceilings where new gypsum board furring will be installed. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: C. D. E. F. 1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. Samples: For each acoustical panel, for each exposed suspension system member, and for each color and texture required. Product test reports. Research/evaluation reports. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acoustical testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or NVLAP-accredited laboratory. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assembles tested for fire resistance per ASTME E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Ratings are indicated by design designations from UL’s “Fire Resistance Directory” or from the listings of another testing and inspection agency. a. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical panels complying with ASTME E 1264 for Class A materials, when tested per ASTME E 84. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and quantities of materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 2.2 GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1 “Direct Hung,” unless otherwise indicated. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, “Direct Hung”) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire. E. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer’s standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Available Products: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.: “Fine Fissured High NRC” in all areas other than restrooms & janitor rooms: a. b. c. d. e. f. Model Number 1810 Edge Profile: Square Size: 24” x 24” x 3/4” NRC Rating: 0.70 CAC Rating: 40 Light Reflectivity: 0.84 2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.: “Fine Fissured Ceramaguard” in all high humidity areas such as restrooms & janitor rooms. a. b. c. d. e. f. Model Number: 607 Edge Profile: Square Size: 24” x 24” x 5/8” NRC Rating: N/A CAC Rating: 40 Light Reflectivity: 0.88 3. Equal products from USG Interiors and Certainteed. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Available Products: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.: 15/16-inch Prelude. 2. Equal products from USG Interiors and Certainteed. 3. Color to match existing grid suspension system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic requirements indicated, per manufacturer’s written instructions and CISCA’s “Ceiling Systems Handbook.” B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building’s structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate with concealed fasteners at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. END OF SECTION 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 09 65 19 – RESILIENT TILE FLOORING AND BASE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to review the following: 1. Review the conditions of the surrounding work paying extra attention to the condition of the substrate concrete slab. 2. Review access and scheduling of this flooring work. 3. Secure verification of acceptable location and color scheme for mockup. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified requirements. 2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in VCT tiles. 2. Type of subfloor. 3. Type of installation. 4. Pattern of installation. 5. Pattern type, location, and direction. C. Samples: Actual samples for each product and for each color and pattern specified. NOTE: Color-copies or photographic copies will not be acceptable. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. 1. 2. 3. Actual samples matching manufacturer’s information as shown. 12 inch by 12-inch tile in each color selected and 12-inch long piece of base material in each color selected for approval. 12-inch long accessory items in each color selected. B. Sample warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. VCT TILE 09 65 19 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level. B. Install a mockup of approximately 100 SF complete with all accessories and base units for review by the OWNER. If accepted, the mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver in manufacturer’s standard packing completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. Store and handle in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. B. Coordinate patching and filling of subfloor with other Sections. C. OWNER will not pay for additional patching and filling. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Standard Warranty for resilient tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Warranty Period: Not less than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE (VCT) A. Product: Class 2 (through pattern tile), 12 by 12 inches by 0.125-inch-thick minimum Vinyl Composite Tile B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Armstrong 2. Tarkett 3. Mannington Mills C. Color and Patterns: Confirm with OWNER. 2.2 BASE A. Product: resilient rubber wall base “2-1/2” high, 1/8-inch thick with straight profile. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Johnsonite C. Color: Confirm with OWNER. 2.3 LATEX FLOOR LEVELING MATERIALS (AS REQUIRED) VCT TILE 09 65 19 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. A. Product: Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete or SDF (Feather Finish) Self-Drying, Cement-Based Finishing Underlayment. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ARDEX ENGINEERED CEMENTS – ARDEX K-15 2.4 JOINING AND EDGE FINISH MOLDINGS A. Product: 1. 2. 3. 4. For use at flooring terminations with other flooring. Tapered or bullnose edge, as required to provide juncture at edge of adjacent floor surfaces. One (1) inch wide by 1/8 inch thick or as applicable to the type of flooring and condition. Rubber or vinyl as recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit application B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Burke Mercer Flexo Johnsonite Domco Tarkett C. Color: Confirm with OWNER. 2.5 ADHESIVE A. Product: 1. For Tile: Clear set type adhesive; same brand as tile or as instructed and approved by tile manufacturer to suit application. a. VOC Content: Not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. For Base: Rubber-based type; same brand as base or as recommended and approved by base manufacturer to suit application a. VOC Content: Not more than 60 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.6 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. VCT TILE 09 65 19 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare concrete floors to receive flooring in accordance with ASTM F710. B. Verify substrates are smooth, level, at required finish elevation, and without more than 1/8inch in 10 feet-0 inch variation from level or slopes shown on the drawings. C. Level substrates by grinding high spots or filling low spots with latex cementitious subfloor filler as required. D. Broom clean or vacuum the surfaces to be covered and inspect the substrates. E. Verify substrates are smooth, level, at required finish elevation, and are ready to receive resilient tile flooring and base. F. Bring discrepancies to the attention of the Architect and do not proceed until such discrepancies are corrected. G. Conduct moisture test in accordance with ASTM F1869 - maximum allowable amount of moisture emission from floor is 3.0 pounds per 1,000 square feet in 24 hour period, and shall not exceed maximum allowable moisture content as allowed by flooring manufacturer. H. Starting Work indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install materials only after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed and after permanent heating and cooling system is operating. 2. Verify that moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature, and relative humidity are within the limits recommended by the manufacturers of the materials used. B. Installing Resilient Tiles: 1. Place units with adhesive cement in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. a. b. c. d. e. Butt units tightly to vertical surfaces, edgings, and thresholds. Scribe as necessary around obstructions and to produce neat joints. Place tiles tightly laid, even, and in straight parallel lines. Extend units into toe spaces, door reveals, and in closets and similar spaces. Extend units under fixed casework and components. 2. Lay units from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that units at opposite edges of the room are of equal width. a. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 3 inches wide at edge of space. b. Lay units square to axes of the room or space. 3. Match units for color and pattern by using materials from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged. 4. Lay in alternating pattern with grain in all units running 90 degrees from adjacent unit. 5. Place joining and edge finish moldings, including reducer strips tightly butted to units and secured with adhesive, providing at all unprotected edges unless otherwise shown. C. Installing Base: 1. Install base where shown on the Drawings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Use factory-preformed exterior corners, and factory preformed or job-mitered interior corners. VCT TILE 09 65 19 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Remove excess adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces, using neutral cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the resilient materials. END OF SECTION 09 68 13 VCT TILE 09 65 19 - 5 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 09 51 13 – ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for patching in existing ceilings where new gypsum board furring will be installed. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: C. D. E. F. 1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. Samples: For each acoustical panel, for each exposed suspension system member, and for each color and texture required. Product test reports. Research/evaluation reports. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acoustical testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or NVLAP-accredited laboratory. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assembles tested for fire resistance per ASTME E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Ratings are indicated by design designations from UL’s “Fire Resistance Directory” or from the listings of another testing and inspection agency. a. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical panels complying with ASTME E 1264 for Class A materials, when tested per ASTME E 84. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and quantities of materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 2.2 GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1 “Direct Hung,” unless otherwise indicated. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, “Direct Hung”) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire. E. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer’s standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Available Products: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.: “Fine Fissured High NRC” in all areas other than restrooms & janitor rooms: a. b. c. d. e. f. Model Number 1810 Edge Profile: Square Size: 24” x 24” x 3/4” NRC Rating: 0.70 CAC Rating: 40 Light Reflectivity: 0.84 2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.: “Fine Fissured Ceramaguard” in all high humidity areas such as restrooms & janitor rooms. a. b. c. d. e. f. Model Number: 607 Edge Profile: Square Size: 24” x 24” x 5/8” NRC Rating: N/A CAC Rating: 40 Light Reflectivity: 0.88 3. Equal products from USG Interiors and Certainteed. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Available Products: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.: 15/16-inch Prelude. 2. Equal products from USG Interiors and Certainteed. 3. Color to match existing grid suspension system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic requirements indicated, per manufacturer’s written instructions and CISCA’s “Ceiling Systems Handbook.” B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building’s structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate with concealed fasteners at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. END OF SECTION 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. SECTION 09 65 19 – RESILIENT TILE FLOORING AND BASE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to review the following: 1. Review the conditions of the surrounding work paying extra attention to the condition of the substrate concrete slab. 2. Review access and scheduling of this flooring work. 3. Secure verification of acceptable location and color scheme for mockup. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified requirements. 2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in VCT tiles. 2. Type of subfloor. 3. Type of installation. 4. Pattern of installation. 5. Pattern type, location, and direction. C. Samples: Actual samples for each product and for each color and pattern specified. NOTE: Color-copies or photographic copies will not be acceptable. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. 1. 2. 3. Actual samples matching manufacturer’s information as shown. 12 inch by 12-inch tile in each color selected and 12-inch long piece of base material in each color selected for approval. 12-inch long accessory items in each color selected. B. Sample warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. VCT TILE 09 65 19 - 1 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level. B. Install a mockup of approximately 100 SF complete with all accessories and base units for review by the OWNER. If accepted, the mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver in manufacturer’s standard packing completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. Store and handle in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. B. Coordinate patching and filling of subfloor with other Sections. C. OWNER will not pay for additional patching and filling. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Standard Warranty for resilient tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Warranty Period: Not less than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE (VCT) A. Product: Class 2 (through pattern tile), 12 by 12 inches by 0.125-inch-thick minimum Vinyl Composite Tile B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Armstrong 2. Tarkett 3. Mannington Mills C. Color and Patterns: Confirm with OWNER. 2.2 BASE A. Product: resilient rubber wall base “2-1/2” high, 1/8-inch thick with straight profile. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Johnsonite C. Color: Confirm with OWNER. 2.3 LATEX FLOOR LEVELING MATERIALS (AS REQUIRED) VCT TILE 09 65 19 - 2 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. A. Product: Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete or SDF (Feather Finish) Self-Drying, Cement-Based Finishing Underlayment. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ARDEX ENGINEERED CEMENTS – ARDEX K-15 2.4 JOINING AND EDGE FINISH MOLDINGS A. Product: 1. 2. 3. 4. For use at flooring terminations with other flooring. Tapered or bullnose edge, as required to provide juncture at edge of adjacent floor surfaces. One (1) inch wide by 1/8 inch thick or as applicable to the type of flooring and condition. Rubber or vinyl as recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit application B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Burke Mercer Flexo Johnsonite Domco Tarkett C. Color: Confirm with OWNER. 2.5 ADHESIVE A. Product: 1. For Tile: Clear set type adhesive; same brand as tile or as instructed and approved by tile manufacturer to suit application. a. VOC Content: Not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. For Base: Rubber-based type; same brand as base or as recommended and approved by base manufacturer to suit application a. VOC Content: Not more than 60 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.6 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. VCT TILE 09 65 19 - 3 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare concrete floors to receive flooring in accordance with ASTM F710. B. Verify substrates are smooth, level, at required finish elevation, and without more than 1/8inch in 10 feet-0 inch variation from level or slopes shown on the drawings. C. Level substrates by grinding high spots or filling low spots with latex cementitious subfloor filler as required. D. Broom clean or vacuum the surfaces to be covered and inspect the substrates. E. Verify substrates are smooth, level, at required finish elevation, and are ready to receive resilient tile flooring and base. F. Bring discrepancies to the attention of the Architect and do not proceed until such discrepancies are corrected. G. Conduct moisture test in accordance with ASTM F1869 - maximum allowable amount of moisture emission from floor is 3.0 pounds per 1,000 square feet in 24 hour period, and shall not exceed maximum allowable moisture content as allowed by flooring manufacturer. H. Starting Work indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install materials only after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed and after permanent heating and cooling system is operating. 2. Verify that moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature, and relative humidity are within the limits recommended by the manufacturers of the materials used. B. Installing Resilient Tiles: 1. Place units with adhesive cement in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. a. b. c. d. e. Butt units tightly to vertical surfaces, edgings, and thresholds. Scribe as necessary around obstructions and to produce neat joints. Place tiles tightly laid, even, and in straight parallel lines. Extend units into toe spaces, door reveals, and in closets and similar spaces. Extend units under fixed casework and components. 2. Lay units from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that units at opposite edges of the room are of equal width. a. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 3 inches wide at edge of space. b. Lay units square to axes of the room or space. 3. Match units for color and pattern by using materials from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged. 4. Lay in alternating pattern with grain in all units running 90 degrees from adjacent unit. 5. Place joining and edge finish moldings, including reducer strips tightly butted to units and secured with adhesive, providing at all unprotected edges unless otherwise shown. C. Installing Base: 1. Install base where shown on the Drawings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Use factory-preformed exterior corners, and factory preformed or job-mitered interior corners. VCT TILE 09 65 19 - 4 Julius Rosenwald Elementary School 6501 Berkeley Drive, New Orleans, LA 70131 July 20, 2018 (DRAFT) Materials Management Group, Inc. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Remove excess adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces, using neutral cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the resilient materials. END OF SECTION 09 68 13 VCT TILE 09 65 19 - 5